Hit7080 -p1
Short Description
Hit7080 general topics...
Description
Optical Networks
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics FT5242EN02GLA01
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Legal notice Intellectual Property Rights All copyrights and intellectual property rights for Nokia Siemens Networks training documentation, product documentation and slide presentation material, all of which are forthwith known as Nokia Siemens Networks training material, are the exclusive property of Nokia Siemens Networks. Nokia Siemens Networks owns the rights to copying, modification, translation, adaptation or derivatives including any improvements or developments. Nokia Siemens Networks has the sole right to copy, distribute, amend, modify, develop, license, sublicense, sell, transfer and assign the Nokia Siemens Networks training material. Individuals can use the Nokia Siemens Networks training material for their own personal self-development only, those same individuals cannot subsequently pass on that same Intellectual Property to others without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks. The Nokia Siemens Networks training material cannot be used outside of an agreed Nokia Siemens Networks training session for development of groups without the prior written agreement of Nokia Siemens Networks. Indemnity The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This document is not an official customer document and Nokia Siemens Networks does not take responsibility for any errors or omissions in this document. This document is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted. No part of this documentation may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation. The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given “as is” and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. IN NO EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA, that might arise from the use of this document or the information in it. THE CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDED "AS IS". EXCEPT AS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE MANDATORY LAW, NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE MADE IN RELATION TO THE ACCURACY, RELIABILITY OR CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT. NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS RESERVES THE RIGHT TO REVISE THIS DOCUMENT OR WITHDRAW IT AT ANY TIME WITHOUT PRIOR NOTICE. This document and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws. The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.
FT5242EN02GLA01 Export Control Marks: N / 5E991 This course is subject to the European Export Control Restrictions.
© 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks. All rights reserved. The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of utility model or design, are reserved. Technical modifications possible. Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
II
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
1
Course introduction SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Sub-sections
Safety instructions
2
Hardware and functionality
3
Operating terminal
4
Operation: Traffic Setup
5
Protection Features
6
Maintenance
7
Abbreviations
8
Appendix
9
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
III
10
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Warnhinweise In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Spannung. Einige Teile können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen. Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverletzungen und Sachschäden führen. Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und wartet. Beachten Sie bitte die nötigen Sicherheitsanforderungen und leisten Sie durch ein problembewusstes Verhalten Ihren Beitrag zur Verhütung von Unfällen jeglicher Art. Gefahren für Leib und Leben / Leben und Gesundheit bzw. Verletzungen, die aus sicherheitswidrigem Handeln resultieren können, sind von einer Haftung durch das Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute ausgeschlossen.
Warnings High voltages are present in certain parts of this equipment. Some parts can also have high operating temperatures. Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in equipment damage. Therefore only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system. Please ensure the necessary safety requirements are met and, by demonstrating a responsible attitude, play your part in avoiding accidents of any kind. Danger to life and limb, life and well being or injuries that could result from actions adverse to safety are excluded from any liability on the part of the Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute.
Atención Algunos elementos de este equipo presentan tensiones altas. Incluso algunos componentes pueden presentar alta temperatura. No observar estas condiciones y las instrucciones de seguridad puede causar daños personales, así como daños al equipo. Por lo tanto el sistema debe ser instalado y mantenido por personal cualificado. Tenga presente los requerimientos de seguridad y contribuya a la prevención de accidentes de toda índole, actuando consciente de los problemas que pudieran surgir. El ' Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute' no se responsabiliza por daños y perjuicios resultantes de actuaciones contrarias a los aspectos de seguridad y que pongan en peligro la salud y la vida de las personas involucradas.
Attention Des tensions élevées sont inevitablement présentes à des points spécifiques de cet équipement électrique. Certains éléments peuvent aussi avoir en service des temperatures élevées. La non-observation de ces conditions et des instructions de sécurité peut engendrer des dégats personnelles ou un endomagement du matériel. Pour ces raisons seulement le personnel formé et qualifié est permi d’installer et de maintenir le système. Veuillez tenir compte des exigences de sécurité nécessaires et contribuer à la prévention des accidents de toutes sortes par un comportement conscient des risques. L'Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute décline toute responsabilité pour les dangers menaçant le corps et la vie / la vie et la santé et/ou les blessures pouvant résulter d'actes contraires à la sécurité.
IV
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Sub-section reference Sub-section identification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
FT52421EN02GLA1 Course intro FT52422EN02GLA1 Safety instruction FT52423EN02GLA1 HW & functionality FT52424EN02GLA1 Operating terminal FT52425EN02GLA1 Operating Traffic Setup FT52426EN02GLA1 Protection Features FT52427EN02GLA1 Maintenance FT52428EN02GLA1 Abbreviations
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
- 44 - 22 - 70 - 56 - 78 - 106 - 62 - 26
This document consists of 464 pages.
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
V
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Foreword The training materials that are handed out are meant for training purposes only. The accompanying document is not a replacement for the official system documentation, and is not meant for self-study. The official system documentation is the only licensed reference work for carrying out work in the field. This student file is your own property.
At the end of the course, your course conductor will give you some course evaluation sheets. We ask you to fill out these sheets and would be pleased to receive suggestions for course improvement regarding the carrying out of the courses and materials used. We at Nokia Siemens Networks wish you successful training.
Training management
VI
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Declaration I confirm, that the software made available to me during the courses from the Nokia Siemens Networks Training Institute for training and practice purposes, will not be further copied outside of the training. Furthermore I assure that no software will be copied on to the training PCs, without the explicit consent of the trainer. With my signature on the attendance list, I confirm that I will adhere to both of the above requests.
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
VII
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
VIII
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Course introduction
Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12
Agenda Course portfolio SURPASS hiT 7080 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 SURPASS hiT 7500 SURPASS hiT 7300 SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet TNMS Core TNMS-M Technology training Further offers
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 5 6 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
1
Course introduction
2
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
1
Agenda
1.Welcome to the Training Institute 2.Prior to the start of the course: Safety Instructions 3.Course information 4.During the course: Breaks; Lunch etc. 5.On completion of the course: Questionnaires; Certificates
Fig. 1
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Course introduction
4
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
2
Course portfolio
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Course introduction
2.1
SURPASS hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7080 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5242 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced Topics courses FT5242, FT5243, FT5244, FT5245, FT5236, FT5247,FT5248 and FT5249 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently.
6
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
FT5242-00S SURPASS hiT 7080 OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced training courses
Duration: 2 days FT5243-00S SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days OR
FT5249-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data Networking
Introduction to Data Networking
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S
TG7011-01S
Understanding TCP/IP Networks
Understanding TCP/IP Networks
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
TG7020-01S
FT5247-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; ASON/ GMPLS Advanced Topics
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5244-00S SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days FT5248-00S Technology Training Core Training Advanced Training
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days OR FT5245-00S SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days
Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT 7080 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics (FT5242-00S) Target Group Service Aim The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to perform selected general operation and maintenance tasks according to given instructions. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks refer to the respective Advanced Topics courses SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities AT (FT5243) SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS Advanced Topics (FT5244) SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics (FT5245) SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; GMPLS Advanced Topics (FT5247) SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248) SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236) SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249) Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. The participant will be able to perform all daily routine tasks on your network elements Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required. Contents Safety Instructions Hardware and Functionality Introduction to the Equipment Hardware Design and Functionality Operating Terminal General Features Getting Started: What you need to navigate Operation Configuration of SDH/PDH Cards and Ports Configuration of Cross Connections Configuration of Path, Line and Card Protection Maintenance Alarm Handling Basic Troubleshooting Replacement of Cards and Modules
8
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Comment Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has full d-lab ability (access to remote training lab)! Duration 2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics (FT5243-00S) Target Group Service Aim The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. All in all you will be able to perform all SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities relevant service tasks in your network Prerequisites Course SURPASS hiT 7080 O&M; General Topics FT5242 or practical OAM experience on SDH equipment is required Contents Safety Instructions System Overview Introduction to the Equipment Hardware Design and Functionality Operation Terminal: Advanced Topics Application SW Installation Administration and NCT Configuration Operation: Advanced Topics Ring Protection Configuration Principles Synchronization Basic Concept Configuration of Synchronization Parameters Performance Management Basic Concept Configuration of Performance Parameters Configuration of TCN and SD Thresholds MCF Configuration Introduction to DCN Configuration of Message Communication Function Overhead Access
10
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Maintenance: Advanced Topics Alarm Configurations Advanced Troubleshooting Administration Access Management Backup and Restore Miscellaneous Comment Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)! Duration 3 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics (FT5244-00S) Target Group Service Aims The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over SONET/SDH EoS relevant service tasks in the network Prerequisites Required: Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities AT (FT5243) Recommended: Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010) Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011) Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020) Contents Technology and Applications Ethernet Next Generation SDH Transport Networks Services Portfolio Ethernet Multiplexing and Mapping Functions Configuration Management for transparent p2p connections Ethernet Card and Port Configuration Concatenation Configuration GFP Assignment Cross Connection Management LCAS Fault Management Performance Management Ethernet Testing
12
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Comment Training is performed on the latest released SW version Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)! Duration 2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
13
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics (FT5236-00S) Target Group Service Planning Engineers Aims The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support synchronization issues in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises All in all the participant will be able to perform all Synchronization relevant service tasks in the network Prerequisites Required for Service: Course SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics (FT5233) Required for Planning Engineers: Course Next Generation Optical Network (FT1102) Contents Synchronization, Terms and Definitions
• Synchronization Basic Principles • Standards and Recommendations • Demonstration of Jitter Synchronization Network Architecture
• • • • •
Clock Types Clock Distribution Reading the Network Synchronization Plan Synchronization in SDH Rings
Setting Options of Synchronization Parameters Synchronization Transfer...
• ...across SDH/PDH Boundaries • ...towards PSTN and PABX • ...via ATM networks
14
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Handling Failures and Reconfigurations
• Automatic Reconfiguration • Test Applications Comment Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)! Duration 2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics (FT5248-00S) Target Group Service Aims The main objective of this course is to enable the participant to support the network element in the field. All advanced topics covered are clearly outlined in the contents. The scope of these topics is beyond the daily routine tasks. Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. All in all the participant will be able to perform all Ethernet over SONET/SDH EoS relevant service tasks in the network Prerequisites Required: Course SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; EoS AT (FT5244) Recommended: Course IP Technology Introduction to Data Networking (TG7010) Course Understanding TCP/IP Networks (TG7011) Course Hands-On TCP/IP (TG7020) Contents Ethernet Switching: Advanced Topics Spanning Tree Algorithm Link Aggregation Group (LAG) Multicast and IGMP Snooping VLAN Introduction How VLANs work Provider Bridges Multiple Spanning Tree (MSTP) VLANs and QoS Configuration Management for mp2mp connections L2 switch card and port configuration Concatenation configuration and GFP assignment LAG VLAN and QoS MSTP Multicast and IGMP Snooping VLAN Tunneling
16
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Fault Management Performance Management Ethernet Testing Comment Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Important hint for On-Site Courses: This course has d-lab ability (access to remote training lab; some few restrictions in practice remain)! Duration 2 Days
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Course introduction
SURPASS hiT 7080 Installation & Commissioning (FT5249-00S) Target Group Service Aims The main objective of this course is to enable you to check the network element installation and to commission it according prescribed procedures. Training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to commission the SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment. Prerequisites Course FT5243 is required. Courses FT5244 is recommended to give a comprehensive background Contents Getting Started Implementation Overview Basic Prerequisites Hardware Racks and Sub-racks Service and Operating Interfaces Commissioning Preconditions and Preparations Powering up the System Configuring the Network Elements Comment Training is performed on the latest released SW version. Duration 1 Day
18
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Course introduction
2.2
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5232 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and FT5239 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
20
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
FT5232-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced training courses
Duration:3 days FT5233-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics Duration:3 days OR
FT5239-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data Networking
Introduction to Data Networking
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks
TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks
Duration:3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration:1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7020-01S
FT5237-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM; ASON/ GMPLS Advanced Topics
Duration:2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5234-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics Duration:2 days OR Technology Training Core Training Advanced Training
FT5238-00S
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days OR FT5235-00S SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days
Fig. 3 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Course introduction
2.3
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025
SURPASS hiT 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5222 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced Topics courses FT5223, FT5224, FT5225, FT5236, FT5228, and FT5229 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
22
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
FT5222-00S SURPASS hiT 7060 (R4.x),hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced training courses
Duration: 2 days FT5223-00S SURPASS hiT 7060 (R.4x),hiT 7035,hiT 7025 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days OR
FT5229-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7060 (R4.x), hiT 7035,hiT 7025 Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronisation Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data Networking
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks Duration: 3 days TG7020-01S Hands-On TCP/IP Duration: 2 days FT5224-00S
Technology Training Core Training Advanced Training
SURPASS hiT 7060 (R4.x), hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Duration: 2 days FT5228-00S SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7035, hiT 7025 OAM; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days
Fig. 4 SURPASS 7060(R4.x), 7035, 7025 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Course introduction
2.4
SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020
SURPASS hiT 7060, 7030, 7020 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5212 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced Topics courses FT5213, FT5214, FT5215, FT5236, and FT5219 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
24
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
FT5212-00S SURPASS hiT 7060,7030,7020 OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced training courses
Duration: 2 days FT5213-00S SURPASS hiT 7060,7030,7020 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days OR
FT5219-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7060,7030,7020 Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronisation Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data Networking
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks Duration: 3 days TG7020-01S Hands-On TCP/IP Duration: 2 days FT5214-00S
Technology Training Core Training Advanced Training
SURPASS hiT 7060,7030,7020 OAM; EoS Advanced Topics
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Duration: 2 days OR FT5215-00S SURPASS hiT 7060 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days
Fig. 5 SURPASS hiT 7060, hiT 7030, hiT 7020 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Course introduction
2.5
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050
SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT5232 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks as advised. To get a deeper understanding and background about these and further tasks the Advanced Topics courses FT5233, FT5234, FT5235, FT5236, FT5236, FT5237, FT5238 and FT5239 are designed. Those cover OAM tasks in various fields like SDH, Data Networking, Synchronization and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
26
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
FT5232-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OM; General Topics
Core and Advanced training courses
Duration:3 days FT5233-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; SDH and Equipment Core Functionalities Advanced Topics Duration:3 days OR
FT5239-00S
FT5236-00S
TG7010-01S
TG7010-01S
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 Installation Commissioning
SURPASS hiT 70 series OAM; Synchronization Advanced Topics
Introduction to Data Networking
Introduction to Data Networking
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks
TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks
Duration:3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration:1 day
Duration: 2 days
TG7020-01S
FT5237-00S
Hands-On TCP/IP
SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM; ASON/ GMPLS Advanced Topics
Duration:2 days
Duration: 4 days
FT5234-00S SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; EoS P2P Advanced Topics Duration:2 days OR Technology Training Core Training Advanced Training
FT5238-00S
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
SURPASS hiT 7070,7050 OAM; EoS- L2 Switching Advanced Topics Duration: 2 days OR FT5235-00S SURPASS hiT 7070 OAM; RPR Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days
Fig. 6 SURPASS hiT 7070, hiT 7050 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Course introduction
2.6
SURPASS hiT 7500
SURPASS hiT 7500 - Standard Training for Service Aim The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.
28
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Core and Advanced training courses FT2222-00S SURPASS hiT 7500 OAM: General Topics Duration:5 days FT2229-00S SURPASS hiT 7500 Commissioning and Advanced Topics Duration:4 days FT2322-00S SURPASS hiT 7500; TransNet Planning Tool Duration:3 days Caption Core Training Advanced Training
Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Fig. 7 SURPASS hiT 7500 Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Course introduction
2.7
SURPASS hiT 7300
SURPASS hiT 7300 - Standard Training for Service Aims The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all OAM and Commissioning tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network elements. A variety of offered Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your network studies even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.
30
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Core and Advanced training courses
FT2212-00S SURPASS hiT 7300 OAM: General Topics Duration: 4 days
FT2219-00S SURPASS hiT 7300 Commissioning and Advanced Topics Duration: 3 days
Caption Core Training Advanced Training
Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Fig. 8 SURPASS hiT 7300 - Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Course introduction
2.8
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet
SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet - Standard Training for Planning Aims The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to plan SURPASS hiT 7500 topologies and routes. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. For this product course the planning tool is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced planning tasks. Target Group Engineering and Planning Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in SDH and fiber optics is required.
32
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Core training courses
TG6240-01S Understanding DWDM Duration: 5 hours FT2322-00S SURPASS hiT 7500; TransNet Planning Tool Duration: 3 days Caption Core Training
recommended - but only optional Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop Web-based Training - Web-based learning software
Fig. 9 SURPASS hiT 7500 TransNet- Core training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Course introduction
2.9
TNMS Core
Training Option TNMS Core - Standard Training for Service Aims The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT9212 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks. For further tasks Advanced Topics courses FT9222, FT9232 and FT1802 are designed. Those cover operation and administration tasks in various fields like DWDM and Data Communication Network DCN. Course FT9219 covers Installation and Commissioning. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network management system. Further on a variety of Technology courses will give you a comprehensive understanding and solid background to carry out your daily work even more efficiently. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required.
34
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Participation on Siemens network element courses is recommended to get a firm background.
Core and Advanced training courses
OR Management of pure SDH networks.
Management of mixed SDH and DWDM networks.
Management of pure DWDM networks. OR
FT9212-00S
FT9212-00S
FT9222-00S
FT9232
TNMS-Core/CDM Operation and Administration for Next Generation SDH networks
TNMS-Core/CDM Operation and Administration for Next Generation SDH networks
TNMS-Core/CDM Operation and Administration for hiT 7300
TNMS Operation and Administration for hiT 7500
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 5 days
Duration: 5 days OR FT9232
FT9222-00S
TNMS Operation and Administration for hiT 7500
TNMS-Core/CDM Operation and Administration for hiT 7300
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 1 day
OR TG7010-01S
FT9219-00S
Introduction to Data Networking
TNMS-Core Installation and Commissioning
Duration:2 days
Duration: 2 days
TG7011-01S Understanding TCP/IP Networks Duration:3 days
Caption Core Training
recommended - but only optional
Advanced Training
Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
FT1802-00S DCN in Next Generation SDH Networks
Technology Training
Duration:4 days
Fig. 10 TNMS Core/CDM - Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Course introduction
2.10
TNMS-M
Training Option TNMS-M - Standard Training for Service Aims The main objective of this course sequence is to enable you to perform all important operation and administration tasks. All topics are clearly outlined in the individual course contents. FT9262 covers general topics that allow you to perform all daily routine tasks. For further tasks the Advanced Topics course FT1802, is designed. This covers operation and administration tasks in Data Communication Network DCN. For all product courses training equipment is prepared to simulate field conditions and is used to perform a variety of Hands-On exercises. You will be able to perform all daily routine and a great many advanced tasks on your network management system. Target Group Service Prerequisites Participants must have some technical knowledge in telecommunications. Some basic knowledge in PDH & SDH is required. Comment TNMS-M LCT is not covered in this course sequence; it is part of the network element training
36
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Core and Advanced training courses
FT0108-00S SURPASS hiT 7060,7030,7020 - Standard Training for Service At least one course
FT9262-00S TNMS-M Operation and Administration Duration: 3 days OR FT1802-00S DCN in Next Generation SDH Networks Duration: 4 days
Caption Curriculum, composed of several course modules Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
Prerequisites Core Training Advanced Training
Fig. 11 TNMS-M Core and advanced training courses
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Course introduction
2.11
Technology training
Training Option IP Technology Training Aims The main objective of the IP Basics Package for everybody is to get an overview about all technologies and applications used in the IP world. It comprises the Introduction to Data Networks for the newcomer and gives advanced information in the wide field of IP level 2 - 4 Switch technologies such as TCP/IP and Internetworking LAN as well as the WAN technologies ATM and Frame Relay plus topics of Internetworking WAN/LAN. The benefit of this package is that the participant has a general understanding of IP including the WAN interfaces. The advanced training courses will lead the student to deepen specific IP topics in regard to layer 2, routing protocols, Quality of Service QoS, Security and the WAN topics ATM and Frame Relay and thus prepares in all aspects for the next generation network. Target Group People from all working areas, who need a comprehensive knowledge of data networks. Prerequisites Basic knowledge of telecommunication
38
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
TG7010-01S Introduction to Data Networking Duration: 2 days OR TG7018-01S
TG7019-01S
TG7011-01S
Technology and Applications of Frame Relay
Technology and Applications of ATM
Understanding TCP/IP Networks
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 2 days
Duration: 3 days OR TG7020-01S Hands-On TCP/IP Duration: 2 days
OR TG7012-01S IP Multiservice Networks Duration: 3 days
OR OR TG7013-01S
TG7014-01S
Ethernet: From LAN to Metro
TCP/IP Advanced
TG7016-01S
TG7015-01S
IP and QoS: IntServ, DiffServ, MPLS
IT Security in Telco Networks - Intro
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 1 day
Duration: 3 days
Duration: 3 days
OR
Caption Prerequisites Core Training Advanced Training Supplementary Training
Classroom Training, Seminar, Workshop
TG7021-01S IT Security Hacking in Telco Networks - Workshop Duration: 4 days
Fig. 12 Technology training
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Course introduction
2.12 2.12.1
Further offers d-lab
What is d-lab? Distant lab or d-lab® is a distant electronic laboratory (set of electronic equipment) which can be accessed remotely
• • • • •
via Internet or via ISDN dial-up connection independently from the location of the equipment available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year
worldwide access possible For the user d-lab offers the same functionality as a lab next door if the functions of the equipment can be handled via PC controlled interfaces. Only real hands-on activities like "insert/change modules" are not possible via remote access. Implementation System/Personnel Requirements System requirements for using d-lab
• • • • • • •
i386 compatible workstation PC, Standard PC Access to the Internet Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher Java enabled Cookies enabled Java runtime environment, at least Version 1.3.1 Port 443 must be allowed on Corporate Firewall
Possibilities Remote Access
• Connect class rooms all over the world to a centralized hardware laboratory High availability
• Round-the-clock shift operation possible Particularly suitable for
• application oriented training • life demos • configuration exercises
40
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Fig. 13 D-LAB
Customers' Added Value
• • • • • •
Only class room PCs with Internet access required Worldwide access possible Reduce equipment costs by centralization of hardware Increase availability of own hardware Save travel costs Reduce down-time costs
Success Stories Carrier Next Generation Optical Networks
Australia, Germany, Croatia, Italy
Carrier Next Generation Switching SURPASS/EWSD
Czech Republic, Thailand, Germany, Vietnam
Carrier Next Generation Switching NetManager
Thailand, Germany
"I was surprised how useful can be the d-laboratory for teaching of topics!" Course participant feedback
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
41
Course introduction
2.12.2
Synchronous Virtual University
What is SVU? The Synchronous Virtual University SVU is web-based learning method. Moderator(s)/Trainer(s) communicate with the participants via the Internet. SVU allows theoretical presentation and practical presentation with d-lab (see above) as well. It is specially aimed for realizing short trainings. Those can be a short info about new products and or features, product training for minor upgrades, technology etc.. Field of Applications
• Training • Collaboration • Announcement Benefits
• • • • • •
Communication via short paths Flexible locations of instructors Arbitrary locations of participants Positive impact on project development due to information flow PACT impact through cuts in travel costs Direct contact with the course instructor
Technical Requirements Standard PC
• Sound card • Headset (commercially available) • We recommend 128 kbit/s for your internet access (a lower bandwidth might result in a poor quality).
• Set the screen resolution to 1024 x 768 pixels and 256 colors. • Java needs to be activated in your browser. • By using a PC optiClient, the application needs to be closed. If it is possible, please activate call forwarding to the voice box during the session.
42
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Course introduction
Moderator
Participant Internet/ Intranet
Participant
Participant
Moderator Fig. 14 SVU
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
Course introduction
Links to the Nokia Siemens Networks Training Academy Internet: https://networks-academy.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsninternet/ Intranet: https://networks-academy.inside.nokiasiemensnetworks.com/nsnintranet/
44
FT52421EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
Safety instructions
Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 4 4.1
Protective measures Protection from high voltages Protective grounding Protection from escaping laser light Handling Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive devices Handling optical fiber connectors and lines Handling batteries Notes Notes on operating the device Notes on working on the subracks Weight information Parts with high operating temperature PC safety instruction PC safety
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 4 4 6 11 12 13 16 17 18 18 18 18 19 20
1
Safety instructions
2
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
Protective measures Achtung! Laser und Glasfaser mechanisch nicht belasten CAUTION LASER AND GLASS FIBER MUST NOT BE PHYSICALLY DAMAGED OR STRAINED
1
V ESD R SE LA
R
MAX EQU IMUM IP WT. M EN T 28 K G
S AS CL
oduct Lase r P r w Class 3B am or vie . e b re into ta nts s e t m o u n tr o s D pti cal in o h it w cal loop dire ctly lose d opti c a in te Opera only.
UNE QU I PP
WT. 12 K
ED
G
1
R
Fig. 1
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Safety instructions
Any installation, adjustment, maintenance or repair of the apparatus must only be carried out by trained, authorized personnel. At all times, personnel must comply with all safety notices and instructions. Specific hazards are indicated by symbol labels on or near the affected parts of the equipment. The labels conform to BS5378, are triangular in shape, and are colored black on a yellow background. An informative text label may accompany the symbol label. Hazard labeling is supplemented by safety notices in the appropriate handbook. These notices contain additional information on the nature of the hazard and may also specify precautions. The notices are categorized as either Warnings or Cautions and are presented in the format shown below.
1.1
Protection from high voltages
When the power supply is involved, VDE 0105 (operation of power installations), which describes the safety measures required, must be observed.
1.2
Protective grounding
Prior to connecting the external cabling to the system rack, the rack frame must be grounded. This grounding must remain for as long as cables are connected externally to the equipment.
4
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Safety instructions
1.3 1.3.1
Protection from escaping laser light Laser classes
According to the safety provisions all laser products must be assigned to a Class from 1 to 4 according to their hazard potential, labeled and fitted with the required protective equipment. Currently two classification schemes, the old one shown in the graphics and a new one are used simultaneously. An instruction program, to be repeated annually, is recommended for persons who use Class 3 A to 4 laser products. Laser safety officers competent in the field only need to be appointed for Class 3B and 4 laser products, however. Unintentional radiation emission must be prevented for Class 2 to 4 laser products. Class 2 or 3A laser products in the service or work area must be clearly recognizable and permanently labeled. Only qualified and trained employees should be assigned to install, adjust and operate class 3A to 4 laser equipment. Use of Class 2 and 3A lasers does not endanger the skin. An eye hazard may be posed in the visible range of laser radiation if the blink reflex is suppressed and Class 2 or Class 3A laser beams are shone directly into the pupil at close range. In general there can be an eye hazard if beams emitted from Class 3A lasers are viewed with collecting optical instruments such as magnifying glasses, telescopes etc. For the "new" laser classes, the following things have changed:
• old class 3A has been split into the new classes 1M and 2M, i.e. these classes are dangerous when viewed e.g. through a fiberscope.
• new is class 3R, as being substantially higher than the 1M (5 times the radiation power), but much less dangerous than class 3B
6
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
Fig. 2 Possible laser hazards
Fig. 3 Table of laser classes
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
7
Safety instructions
1.3.2 1.3.2.1
Classes of equipment used SDH equipment
Synchronous optical fiber systems contain laser equipment. In the case of operation in a closed system, this equipment meets the safety level of Class 1 laser equipment. Devices and modules which carry one of these signs are fitted with laser equipment.
LASER CLASS 1
Transmission systems which are fitted with optical laser amplifier modules are assigned to Danger Class 3A, taking into account foreseeable malfunctions. They are identified by the following labeling of the amplifier modules: Laser Klasse 3A Nicht in den Strahl blicken, auch nicht mit optischen Instrumenten, Sendebetrieb nur im geschlossenen optischen System.
Class 3A Laser Product Do not stare into beam or view directly with optical instruments. Operate in a closed optical loop only.
Fig. 4
For safe operation of the whole optical section, activation of the laser safety shutdown with blocking of the automatic cyclical laser startup is provided. Installation must be done in a closed system with protection. To avoid damage to health, the regulations on laser radiation safety (DIN VDE 0837/IEC 825) must be observed.
8
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
1.3.2.2
DWDM equipment
When operated in a closed system, the laser equipment of the device conforms to class 1 safety level. Within the device, hazard level 1M might occur. Several Modules when open can belong to laser class 3 or even 4. Labeling of the single modules is done accordingly. Caution: So that the Laser Class 1 (or 1M within the device) limits are met, it is not permitted to carry out any mechanical modifications with the optical (laser) modules. If any modification of these modules is realized or if the system is not operated according to the regulations, the operating authorization will expire. The laser radiation applied is invisible. Nevertheless, in view of possible malfunctions, laser class 1 (or 1M within the device) has to be notified. If the automatic laser shutdown APSD is disabled, laser class 3B has to be notified. Notwithstanding the above, any optical fiber cable which is open on one side should be regarded as being ‘in operation’. Never look into the end of a fiber, fiber connector, fiber patchcoard, fiber pigtail or plug-in module connector until you are SURE that no light is present. Permanent eye damage or blindness can result if exposed to such optical power levels, even for extremely short durations. Always use whatever safety devices are supplied (caps, shutters, etc.). Read and follow all laser warning labels affixed to the device.
Fig. 5 Warning labels on DWDM equipment
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Safety instructions
10
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
2
Handling
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Safety instructions
2.1
Handling of modules with electrostatic sensitive devices All modules contain electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD)!
Modules that bear this label have electrostatic sensitive devices, i.e. when handling them the required safety measures must be configured with. When modules with the electrostatic sensitive device symbol are packed, unpacked, touched, extracted or inserted, grounding bracelets must always be worn. This ensures that the modules are not damaged. ESD
For this purpose, there are two appropriately marked grounding sockets on the rack, that accommodate the connecting plug of the grounding bracelet.
Fig. 6
Every printed circuit board has a grounding outer edge, which is connected to the ground of the module, by which the board can be held. Touching the component terminals, the contacts of the SIEDECON plug connector or the conductor tracks (even if you are grounded correctly) must be avoided. When modules are removed and inserted while installation and maintenance work is being carried out, the insertion and extraction aids fitted to them must be used. Modules which are in a screened, unopened housing are protected in any case. European Standard EN50082-1 gives guidelines for appropriate handling of electorstatic sensitive devices. No special rules must be observed when handling sub-racks. There is danger of injury when the cover of the sub-rack is open. For this reason, while working on the sub-rack, the sub-rack cover must be lifted in the open state and then removed. On completion, this cover must be replaced and closed.
12
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
2.2
Handling optical fiber connectors and lines
Optical connectors are precision parts and must be handled accordingly. Perfect function is only ensured if the following points are observed:
• Optical fiber connectors must always be protected from mechanical damage and dirt by a protective cap. The dust protection caps should only be removed immediately before fitting.
• After the dust protection caps are removed, the faces of the optical fiber plugs
must be checked for cleanliness and cleaned if necessary. For cleaning, the optical fiber cleaning tool C52334-A380-A926 or a perfectly clean, lint-free cellulose cloth or chamois leather can be used. Freon TF, isopropyl alcohol (99%) or spirit can be used as the cleaning fluid.
• Mechanical damage to the faces of optical connectors reduces transmission
quality (increases attenuation), impact stresses must therefore be avoided when handling the connectors. Optical fiber lines must never be bent to a radius of less than 30 mm!
Achtung! Laser und Glasfaser Follow instructions about mechanical handling of lasers mechanisch nicht belasten CAUTION and optical fibers on the optical modules. LASER AND GLASS FIBER MUST NOT BE PHYSICALLY DAMAGED OR STRAINED
Fig. 7
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
13
Safety instructions
2.2.1
Cleaning of fibers
Once the protective dust caps have been removed or if a fiber connection was opened, you must check under high magnification the surfaces of the optical fiber connectors to ensure that they are clean, and clean them if necessary. Also do this with increased optical attenuation. The importance of clean fiber ends and connectors cannot be overemphasized. NEVER make any fiber connection until the mating components are first cleaned, and cleanliness is verified under magnification. Failure to do so will most likely result in irreversible damage to fiber and/or connectors, necessitating their replacement. Burnt-in dust particles also burn the transition area of a clean mating connector ("optical virus"). This is especially important when changing modules.
2.2.2
Fiber endface inspection criteria after cleaning
The fiber ends can be regarded as properly cleaned, when the following criteria are fulfilled (valid for fibers with a radius of R = 125 µm) 1. The 25 µm Area (area up to 25 µm which also includes the 9 µm Core Glass Area) must not have any visible scratches, impurities, or other damage. 2. In the Cladding Glass Area (R = 25-100 µm) at least the inner 50% must be completely free of scratches, impurities, or other damage. The other 50% must fulfill the following criteria: They must not have any scratches which are significantly broader or deeper than 1 µm. Impurities of up to 10 µm are, tolerated, however the glass must not be chipped under any circumstances. 3. In the Overclad Area of the fiber (beyond a range of 100 µm), isolated rough scratches, impurities and chipped edges are tolerated up to 15 µm. All impurities must be easily removable. In the pictures some examples are given for acceptable and unacceptable fiber endfaces.
14
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
Fig. 8 Fiber endface structure
Fig. 9 Endface examples
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Safety instructions
2.3
Handling batteries
To avoid loss of data, replacement of the battery must be handled by the manufacturer. Therefore the module (e.g. system controller unit) has to be removed as described in the MMN manual and sent in a special cover (ESD protection) to the manufacturer. The lithium battery on the module must be replaced with an identical type or one recommended by the manufacturer. If it is replaced incorrectly, there is danger of explosion. The lithium battery must be disposed of according to the local regulations for disposal of special waste.
16
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
3
Notes
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Safety instructions
3.1
Notes on operating the device
The device must only be operated with the cover closed.
3.2
Notes on working on the subracks
There is danger of injury when the cover of the subrack is open. For this reason, while working on the subrack, the subrack cover must be lifted in the open state and then removed. On completion, the subrack cover must be replaced and closed.
3.3
Weight information
MAXIMUM EQUIPMENT WT. 23.4 KG
UNEQUIPPED WT. 13.2 KG
Note the weight data given in subrack label. Maximum safe lifting weight for one person = 18 kg. subrack empty weight = 13.2 kg subrack full weight = 23.4 kg The weight shown in kilograms is only approximate.
Fig. 10
3.4
Parts with high operating temperature Certain parts (e.g. heat sinks) operate at a high temperature. You can get injured when touching these parts! Caution When the subrack cover is opened these parts are accessible!
Fig. 11
18
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
4
PC safety instruction
Fig. 12
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Safety instructions
4.1
PC safety
• Transport the device only in its original packaging, or equivalent, to protect it from knocks and jolts.
• During installation and before operating the device, observe any instructions on environmental conditions in the Operating manual of the device.
• If the device is brought into the installation site from a cold environment,
condensation can form. Before operating the device, wait until it is absolutely dry and has reached approximately the same temperature as the installation site.
• Ensure that the local line voltage remains within the range of this device. Check
the rated voltage set for this device (see the Operating Manual and type plate of the device).
• The device has a specially approved power cable and must only be connected to a grounded wall outlet.
• Ensure that the power socket on the device or the grounded wall outlet is freely accessible.
• The power switch does not disconnect the device from the line voltage. To
disconnect the line voltage completely, remove the power plug from the grounded power outlet (see also the Operating Manual of the device).
• Connect the device and the attached peripherals to the same circuit. • Lay all cables so that nobody can stand on them or trip over them. Refer to the relevant notes in the Operating Manual when connecting the device.
• No data transmission cable should be connected or disconnected during a thunderstorm.
• Please ensure that no objects or liquids can get into the interior of the device (electrical shock, short circuit).
• In emergency cases (e.g., damaged casing, elements or cables, penetration of liquids or foreign matter), switch off the device immediately, remove the power connector and contact your sales office or customer service.
• Only qualified technicians may repair the device. Unauthorized repair may represent a serious hazard to the user (electric shock, fire risk).
• Proper operation of the device (in accordance with IEC 950/EN60950) is only
ensured if the casing is completely assembled and the rear covers are in place (electric shock, cooling, fire protection, interference suppression).
• When cleaning the device, observe the relevant notes in the Operating Manual.
20
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Safety instructions
• Before opening the device, first switch it off and then disconnect the power plug.
When opening the device observe the instructions in the associated Operating Manual or Technical Manual. Install only system expansions that satisfy the requirements and rules governing safety and electromagnetic compatibility and relationing to telecommunications terminal equipment. If you install other expansions, you may damage the system or violate the safety regulations and regulations governing RFI suppression. Information on which system expansions are suitable can be obtained from the customer service or your sales office. The components (e.g. power supply) marked with a warning sign (e.g. lightning sign) may only be opened, removed or exchanged by authorized, qualified personnel.
• The warranty is voided if the device is damaged during the installation or replacement of system expansions.
• You may set only those resolutions and refresh rates specified in the "Technical
data" section of the monitor description. Otherwise you may damage your monitor.
• Batteries must only be disposed of in accordance with local regulations concerning special waste.
• Data cables to peripheral devices must be adequately shielded. WARNING Incorrect replacement of the device's battery may lead to a risk of explosion. The battery may be replaced only with an identical battery or with a type recommended by the manufacturer.
4.1.1
CE certificate
The PC complies with the requirements of the EEC directive 89/336/EEC „Electromagnetic compatibility“ and 73/23/EEC „Low voltage directive“ with amending directive 93/67/EEC.
4.1.2
Notes on the laser
The following applies if your PC is equipped with a CD-ROM drive. The CD-ROM drive contains an LED (light emitting diode) classified according to IEC 825-1:1993: LASER CLASE 1.
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Safety instructions
22
FT52422EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Hardware and functionality
Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2 2.1 3 3.1 3.2
Introduction to the equipment An introduction to the converged network Transport layers: efficiency of convergence SURPASS next generation optics SURPASS multi-service optical networks What is next – generation SDH? SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview Network applications System manuals Documentation overview Hardware design and functionality Hardware design Functionality
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 4 6 8 10 12 14 26 31 32 35 36 44
1
Hardware and functionality
2
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
1
Introduction to the equipment
Why is NGDiffServ? SDH? What
Fig. 1
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Hardware and functionality
1.1
An introduction to the converged network
New World of Communications Services It’s a whole new world of communications services, and that world is packet based. The legacy model, in which voice, video, and data are delivered separately over dedicated, single purpose networks, no longer meets the needs of 21st century businesses. Today’s businesses require more dynamic services; and they need versatile computing platforms and real-time, interactive applications to support their new, business critical needs. As time goes on, it is increasingly clear that the legacy model is just not up to it. IP Infrastructure Instead business needs are being increasingly supported by a next-generation network that manages diverse traffic types within the context of a converged service in which voice, data, and video coexist on a single, shared facility. This converged network supports all of the user’s traffic types with packet-based protocols such as ATM, Frame Relay, or IP. Of these, the dominant protocol in the access, edge, and core of the network is the Internet Protocol (IP). A managed IP infrastructure for both voice and data transmission is a concept that has begun to revolutionize the industry. It leverages the Internet so that enhanced services can be offered at lower costs, and it is motivating the development of a family of dynamic, next generation, real time applications. Different Characteristics of Voice and Data Traffic As most people recognize, voice and data traffic have significantly different characteristics and are difficult to reconcile within a single network. Data traffic tends to be bursty, consuming large volumes of bandwidth for occasional, short intervals whereas voice traffic is predictable and requires a steady, low-delay, transmission path from end to end. TIP Existing Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) circuit-based networks were originally designed to carry these predictable streams of voice traffic but do not efficiently support bursty data traffic.
4
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Change in Infrastructure With data growth now outpacing voice, service providers face the challenge of shedding inefficient TDM infrastructures while preserving the integrity and quality of private-line and voice traffic. This change is leading to a gradual replacement of the existing circuit switched infrastructure with new packet-based equipment. Two additional factors provide an even more compelling need for service providers to speed up their infrastructure conversion:
• Deregulation and competition between incumbent and new service providers • The worldwide explosion in mobile communications
Next Generation Network Architecture SURPASS Next Generation Management
NGN Management
NGN Control SURPASS Next Generation Switching
NGN Control Media Gateways
Application/Video Servers
PSTN/ Mobile Network
NGN Core SURPASS Next Generation Optics
IP/Optical Backbone
NGN Access Media Gateway
Triple Play Voice, Video, Data
Residential Customers
Access Gateway
Metro Optics
Multi-Service Access
CPE PBX
LAN
SURPASS Next Generation Access
Business Customers
Fig. 2 Next Generation Architecture
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Hardware and functionality
1.2
Transport layers: efficiency of convergence
The transport network need not only be flexible, scalable, and manageable but also at the same time be open and transparent to the types of client services supported. In that sense the transport network is a point of convergence for the various type of services (voice, leased lines, data, and internet) offered by a network operator and should be transparent to the client service type and flexible to the growth of particular service types and the traffic mix that may result. This can only be achieved through a layered network approach where a product with specific attributes is deployed to specifically address the requirements of the client services in that domain. A layered structure on of the transport network is a consequence of the worldwide drive to more efficient networking measured through cost per switched unit parameter. Triggered by the universal application and deployment of IP technology, the ‘traditional’ border between enterprise and public communications has been blurred and is slowly disappearing. IP-based applications and the deployment of IP technology not only established the basis for greater transmission speeds but also increased the demand for new communication services. Yesterday’s focus on transmission was purely on circuit provisioning with SDH and DWDM. Data world was based purely on connectionless Ethernet switching and IP routing. However, the trend in data services, stretching out of the local area into the metro and regional transmission domain, is changing the requirements for switching and routing platforms, for example with the introduction of protocols and mechanisms for traffic separation and circuit orientation (VLAN technology and MPLS). Transmission networks and systems are therefore also evolving to include mapping of multiple service and signal types into the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy as well as multipoint connectivity and statistical multiplexing for enhanced traffic concentration. As a result, in order to reduce costs for network operators, tomorrow’s transmission networks must efficiently manage both types of services – provisioned point-to-point circuits and switched multi-point data services – simultaneously in one platform. Having only one converged network managing both traffic types reduces investment. This ultimately leads to fewer optical interfaces and, in addition, lowers operational expenditures. SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks meets the demand of a complete IPoptimized solution for regional and metropolitan areas. Data and Ethernet functions plus integrated Storage Area Network capabilities are added to the full set of classic transport features for TDM services. Both the existing and the new services are managed with one single network and service management system, the TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System.
6
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence Data/Internet
Voice
Leased Lines
National / Long Distance Layer Broadband SDH / DWDM
Key objectives: Growth & traffic mix
Layered Transport Network
Regional / Metropolitan Layer Broadband SDH / DWDM
Flexibility and scalability Service differentiation
Switch
Operational Efficiency
Local / Access Layer Wideband SDH
Fig. 3 Transport Layers: Efficiency of Convergence
SURPASS NG Optics: Customer Benefits Backbone
Reduced cost of bit/km with a transparent DWDM network
Regional/ Metro Core
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
Metro Access/Edge
Up to 40% CAPEX savings due to modular design, multi service capability (Ethernet, TDM, SAN), high port density Up to 30% OPEX savings due to plug and play feature, one network management system, family concept/spare parts reduction, fast service provisioning New profitable services for business customers
SAN: Storage Area Networks
POTS, ISDN, xDSL
Mobile
Enterprise ( Data,Voice, SAN)
Other carrier
Fig. 4 Transport Layers: Portfolio Overview
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
7
Hardware and functionality
1.3
SURPASS next generation optics
The solutions for Next Generation Optics include optical backbone, metro core and metro edge networks. It guarantees top reliability, multi-service aggregation and longhaul transportation. Its scalability, intelligent networking functionality and centralized network management ensures streamlined operations and fast provisioning of customer specific bandwidth and services. SURPASS Next Generation Optics include revenue generating multi-service transport solutions with lowest networking costs:
• SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks • SURPASS Transparent Optical Networks • SDH and DWDM - complete and future proof network from the edge to the backbone
• Intelligent Switching Platform (Sycamore SN16000) • TNMS - Best-in-class network management for optical networks: MultiVendor and Multi-Technology management;
• Enterprise VPN
8
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS Next Generation Optics
Multi-Service Optical Networks
Transparent Optical Networks
Telecommunication Network Management System
Fig. 5 SURPASS Next Generation Optics
Summary: Next Generation Optics TNMS-C
SURPAS S hiT Trans parent Optical Networks
Backbone/ Regional SURPASS hiT 7500/7300
Regional/ Metro Core
Metro WDM
S URPASS hiT
FSP
Multi Se rv ice Optic al Networks
S DH / ne xt-gen. SDH
SL, SMA, SX
SURPASS hiT 7080/70/60/ HC
ISP ISP POP POP
Metro Access/Edge
SDH
CPE
next-gen. S DH
SURPASS hiT 7050/35/30 GbE
SL, SMA,
GbE
Business Customer
CPE Enterprise (storage area netw.)
NAS
SURPASS hiT 7030/25/20/CPE
CPE
Fig. 6 Summary: Next Generation Optics
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Hardware and functionality
1.4
SURPASS multi-service optical networks
The complete family of SURPASS hiT 70 series Multi-Service Provisioning Platforms allows building new and extending existing metro and regional transport networks. With SURPASS hiT 70 series IP-optimized transport networks can be built, with data and Ethernet functions being added to the classical transport features. It also is the key to full featured multi-service access for corporate customers. SURPASS hiT 70 series customer premises equipment (CPE) delivers multiple services for telephony, Ethernet connectivity e.g. intranet meshing, business video applications, storage area networking (SAN) and Internet access applications. Such flexibility is necessary to be able to offer each customer both business class and economy class types of services. To guarantee the quality of service, SDH technology is used to securely separate the different traffic streams. There are a number of compelling reasons why SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks is the perfect answer to the challenges carriers face in the evolution of their metro and regional platforms:
• Multi-Service Provisioning supports both classic leased lines and new, switched Ethernet services simultaneously on one common minimum-cost platform.
• Existing Investment is safeguarded since utilization of the existing network
infrastructure is vastly improved by applying standard technology for IP-optimized transport solutions without affecting legacy solutions.
• Supplying new, profitable services that explicitly meet the growing demands of
corporate customers, increases revenue. Carrier-grade quality of service is maintained for both existing and new services while building future-proof flexibility into the network.
• Blending transmission and switching technologies in a common minimum-cost
platform, as opposed to pure packet solutions, reduce investment and Operational Costs.
• Plug & Play Commissioning in SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Network solutions, a comprehensive set of plug & play features, including automatic card detection and topology discovery, simplifies operations dramatically, thus reducing operational expenditures.
• Operation is optimized with TNMS, the Siemens network management solution that provides centralized control and supervision of the entire optical network.
10
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks
Use Use of of existing existing technology technology and and installed installed SDH SDH base base Network Convergence with lowest OPEX and Network Convergence with lowest OPEX and minimum minimum additional additional Capital Capital Expenditures Expenditures (CAPEX) (CAPEX) One One Platform Platform for for Ethernet, Ethernet, TDM, TDM, WDM WDM and and SAN SAN
Next Gen. SDH
Carrier-grade Ethernet
Service transparency
TNMS Configuration Tool
+
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
TNMS
+
TNMS
=
Fig. 7 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networks
SURPASS Multi Multi Service Optical Networking Networking SDH SD H migrates migrates to metro/edge metro/edge The metro access access networks consolidate consolidate Voice, Data, Legacy services, Leased Leased lines... lines...
SDH SD H evolves to MSPP (Ethernet/TDM/SAN (Ethernet/T DM/SAN over SDH) SDH ) Ethernet Ethernet Layer Layer 2 functionalities brings an optimal optimal and intelligent way way to transport and handle handle triple triple play traffic traffic over one one single network network
Ethernet /SONET networks Ethernet over SDH SDH builds on installed base base of of SDH SDH/SONET to preserve investment in in installed base and know-how
Æ Next Gen SDH = Multi - Service Provisioning Platform Fig. 8 SURPASS Multi Service Optical Networking
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Hardware and functionality
1.5
What is next – generation SDH?
What exactly is a Next-Generation SDH solution? A basic definition is:
• NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in CAPEX and OPEX compared to legacy SDH.
NG SDH solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve these improvements by:
• Decreasing Footprint • Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/ Any Service Mix) • Increasing Port Density • Integrated VC-4/VC-12 Switching Fabrics (Switching Cards) • Use of new technologies like Generic Framing procedure (GFP), Virtual
Concatenation and Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme (LCAS) allow for: - Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN) - Offering granularity of bandwidth - Improved network utilization and efficiency - Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities
12
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
What is Next-Generation SDH? NG SDH solutions must enable real significant savings in CAPEX and OPEX compared to legacy SDH! NG SDH Solutions like SURPASS Multi-Service Optical Networks achieve this improvements by:
Decreasing Footprint Improving Scalability and Flexibility (Any Size/Any Service Mix) Increasing Port Density Integrated VC4/VC12 Switching Fabrics
+
Use of new technologies like GFP, VC and LCAS which allow for: Efficient support of data applications (Ethernet, SAN) Offering granularity of bandwidth Improved network utilization and efficiency Fast/flexible bandwidth and service provisioning capabilities
Fig. 9 What is Next Generation SDH?
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Hardware and functionality
1.6
SURPASS hiT 70xx product portfolio overview
SURPASS hiT 70xx NEs are SDH based Multi Service Provisioning Platforms (MSPP). The product family is reaching from high – end multiple ADM64 to MultiService Customer Premises Equipment:
• SURPASS hiT 7080 • SURPASS hiT 7070 • SURPASS hiT 7060 / (HC) • SURPASS hiT 7050 • SURPASS hiT 7035 • SURPASS hiT 7030 • SURPASS hiT 7025 • SURPASS hiT 7020 • SURPASS certified CPEs
14
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio Portfolio benefits New
•
Ne twork a pplication s from CP E to Metro Core
• •
Ne twork re liability and scalabil ity
• •
TDM servi ces
• •
ASTN/GMPLS functi on ality
hiT 7070
Optimized product fit for every use case Ethernet se rvices incl. L2 Seamless in terworking with C/DWDM
hiT 7050
hiT 7080
hiT 7025 hiT 7060
New New
hiT 7030
hiT 7035
hiT 7020 Fig. 10 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Portfolio
hiT 7080
HE CC/ADM, multiple STM-64
hiT 7070 SC / DC
ADM / CC, multiple STM-64
hiT 7060 HC
ADM-64, multiple STM-16
hiT 7060
ADM, multiple STM-16
hiT 7050 CC
ADM-16
hiT 7035
ADM-16/-4
hiT 7025
ADM-16/-4/-1
hiT 7050 FP1
ADM-4 modular
hiT 7030
ADM-4/-1 modular
hiT 7020
ADM-4/-1 single board
TNMS Netmanagement
Application
no redundancy
Product
full redundancy
NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview
Fig. 11 NG Metro: hiT 70xx Product Overview
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7080 SURPASS hiT7080 is a powerful core network product suitable for being deployed in metro and regional area with combined SDH, Layer 2 switching, ASON/GMPLS, OTN and WDM functionalities. It is equipped with a 340G VC-4 switching fabric specifically targeted for handling large amounts of GE, 10GE, and STM-64 traffic and can interface directly with DWDM systems. SURPASS hiT 7080 provides 20G (128 x 128 VC-4 equivalents) or 40G (256 x 256 VC-4s equivalents) Low order (VC-3/VC-12 granularity) matrix capability.
SURPASS hiT 7070 This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform is a single cost-effective transport platform that is optimized for both bursty packet and traditional narrowband and wideband voice traffic. This solution offers the highest degree in flexibility and scalability (any size for any service mix), quick service provisioning and new revenuerich services. It offers non-blocking 160G@VC-4 and multiple 10G@VC-3/VC-12 switching granularity as well as RPR packet fabric @2G5 and WDM operation. SURPASS hiT 7070 is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.
16
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary Multi Service Platform for PDH, SDH, WDM and Data Integration
hiT 7080: 340G@VC-4 and 40G@VC-12 / VC-3 Switching Granularity
Packet fabrics (RPR)
Extended P2P and L2 Ethernet functionalities
Integrated STM-16 DWDM Interfaces for direct interworking with hiT 7300 and FSP3000
Extensive protection features (HW, SNCP, MSP 1+1/1:N, 2F MS-SPRing, DNI)
GMPLS/ASON based restoration
Extension Shelf solutions (SURPASS hit 7035)
Fig. 12 SURPASS hiT 7080: Executive Feature Summary
hiT 7070: Executive Feature Summary 160 Gb/s HO + 4x 10 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64 Eth/FE/GbE/10GbE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp Transparent Services over WDM 1+1, 1:1, 1:N MSP, SNCP and 2F/4F MS-SPRing EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS L2 Service Multiplexer and L2 Switch GMPLS/ASON based restoration Integrated @ TNMS Core
Fig. 13 SURPASS hiT 7070: Executive Feature Summary
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7060 HC This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport, access, and switching functions into one powerful and cost – effective unit and is designed for metro aggregation network applications. SURPASS hiT 7060 HC employs an innovative dual TDM/Data plane design, with large SDH high-order cross-connect capacity (70G) and substantial low-order cross connect (5G) capacity. Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported. Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT 7060 HC is operating at the STM-16 and/or STM-64 levels.
SURPASS hiT 7060 This Next Generation Multi-Service Provisioning Platform integrates transport, access and switching functions into one powerful and cost – effective unit and is designed for Metro aggregation network applications. From de cross connection capacity point of view, there are two variant. For releases 3.x the capacity is 70G for High Order cross connections (VC-4) and 5G for Low Order cross connections (VC-3 and VC-12). For releases 4.x the cross connection capacity is 25G for High Order and 10G for Low Order. VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12Matrix
Matrix 70G
70Gbps (448 x 448 VC-4s) non blocking
5Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s) non blocking
Matrix 25G
25Gbps (160 x 160 VC-4s) non blocking
10Gbps (4032 x 4032 VC-12s) non blocking
Integrated operation of NE with the extension shelf SURPASS hiT 7035 is supported. Data L2 services can be provided via L2 switch and/or RPR modules. SURPASS hiT 7060 is operating at the STM-16 level.
18
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary 70 Gb/s HO + 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity within a single switching fabric TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/-4/-16/-64 Eth/FE/GBE @ p2p/p2mp/mp2mp L2 switch / aggregation / RPR / ESR EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing @STM-64/-16/-4 HW protection: controller, matrix, power
Fig. 14 SURPASS hiT 7060 HC: Executive Feature Summary
hiT 7060: Executive Feature Summary 70 Gb/s HO + 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity within a single switching fabric 25 Gb/s HO + 10 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity including STM-16/STM-4 IF TDM Interfaces: 2M/34M/45M/STM-1/4/16 1:N Card PDH Card Protection Layer 2 switching and aggregation/RPR/RSTP EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-16 Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
Fig. 15 SURPASS hiT 7060: Executive Feature Summary
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7050 SURPASS hiT 7050 is a modular system designed for applications at customer premises and the metro access layer. The equipment itself is designed to provide a cost effective and flexible multi-service network node or termination. SURPASS hiT 7050 supports PDH, SDH and Ethernet signals at various bit-rates. The switching fabric is able to aggregate; groom and cross connect traffic without restrictions, from VC-4 down to VC-12 level. Furthermore it is even possible to enhance the functionality by simply plugging a packet switching fabric to the basic configuration. The following variants exist:
• SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 (FlatPack 1) with a switching capacity of 32 x 32 STM-1 (5G)
• SURPASS hiT 7050 CC (CompactCore) with a switching capacity of 64 x 64 STM1 (10G) and enhanced availability
All can be equipped with 2 different trunk port types: SURPASS hiT 7050 FP1 with STM-1 or STM-4 uplink capacity SURPASS hiT 7050 CC with STM-4 or STM-16 uplink capacity
SURPASS hiT 7035 SURPASS hiT 7035 in its first release is used as extension shelf for hiT 7060, hiT 7060 HC and hiT 7080 to extend the number of 2 Mbit/s interfaces which can be supported by one NE. The NE is available also as standalone ADMX. The SURPASS hiT 7035 can operate using two kinds of matrix cards: 1. CC + one STM-16/-4 card:
• High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 15 Gbps (98 x 98 VC-4s) • Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 5 Gbps (2016 x 2016 VC-12s) 2. CC + one STM-4/-1 card:
• High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC): 7.2 Gbps (46 x 46 VC-4s) • Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC): 2.5 Gbps (1008 x 1008 VC-12s)
20
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7050: Executive Feature Summary 5G and 10G@VC-12 Switching Granularity MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services: 2/34/45Mbps, STM-1/-4/-16, 10/100BaseT, GbE 1:N 2Mbps Card PDH Card Protection Layer 2 switching and aggregation EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-16 Integrated @ TNMS Core
Fig. 16 SURPASS hiT 7050: Executive Feature Summary
hiT 7035: Executive Feature Summary 7.2G HO + 2.5G LO Switching Capacity including STM-1/STM-4 IF 15G HO + 5G LO Switching Capacity including STM-4/STM-16 IF Can be used as Extension Shelf for hiT 7080/7060HC/7060 ATM-IMA aggregation for mobile networks Layer 2 switching EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1:N; 1+1 MSP; SNCP; MS-SPRing for STM-4/16 and DNI Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
Fig. 17 SURPASS hiT 7035: Executive Feature Summary
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7030 SURPASS hiT 7030 integrates transport, access and switching into one compact, efficient platform and is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks. In addition to traditional PDH and SDH interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set of client data interfaces including L2 switching capabilities. SURPASS hiT 7030 is operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 levels and has:
• SDH high-order cross-connect capacity of 16 x 16 VC-4s (2,5G) • SDH low-order cross connect capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s. SURPASS hiT 7025 SURPASS hiT 7025 is a compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 system positioned for Metro Access applications. In addition to traditional PDH and SDH interfaces, it provides a rich and diversified set of client data interfaces including L2 switching capabilities. SURPASS hiT 7025 handle two matrix cards. One of them, handle in the faceplate of the card, one operating at the STM-1 or STM-4 port:
• High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 46 x 46 VC-4s (7G) • Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 1008 x 1008 VC-12s (2,5G). Alternatively version SURPASS hiT 7025 is also available operating at the STM-4 or STM-16 levels with:
• High Order Cross-Connection (HOCC) capacity of 98 x 98 VC-4s (15 G) • Low Order Cross-Connection (LOCC) capacity of 2016 x 2016 VC-12s (5G)
22
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7030: Executive Feature Summary
STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services slim-line chassis – 2 HU Layer 2 switching and aggregation EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4 Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
Fig. 18 SURPASS hiT 7030: Executive Feature Summary
hiT 7025: Executive Feature Summary 7 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and 2,5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-1/-4 I/F 15 Gb/s HO Switching Capacity and 5 Gb/s LO Switching Capacity with STM-4/-16 I/F MSPP for PDH, SDH and Ethernet Services E1, E3/DS3, STM-1e Card Protection Layer 2 switching and aggregation EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4/16 Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
Fig. 19 SURPASS hiT 7025: Executive Feature Summary
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
23
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7020 SURPASS hiT 7020 is a very compact and integrated STM-1/STM-4 system positioned for Metro Access applications. SURPASS hiT 7020 supports data (FE) and PDH (E1) traffic. The system can be ordered in various system configurations (AC or DC power supply, E1 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm) as listed in the table below: System Configuration
LOCC (VC-4 equivalent)
SDH Line Interface
E1 ports
FE ports
A (Rel. 3.1)
4×4
2× STM-1
8
-
B (Rel. 3.1)
4×4
2× STM-1
8
4× FE/L2
C (Rel. 3.2)
4×4
2× STM-1
8
4 x FE/T
D (Rel. 3.2)
16 × 16
2× STM-1/4
8
-
E (Rel. 3.2)
16 × 16
2× STM-1/4
8
4× FE/L2
F (Rel. 3.2)
16 × 16
2× STM-1/4
8
4 x FE/T
Table - System Configuration SURPASS hiT 7020 is designed to satisfy medium or low capacity metro multiservices access requirements for service provider or private enterprise networks. SURPASS certified CPE's: SURPASS certified CPE's are cost-optimized, ultra-compact multi-service CPE’s with application specific design that are completing the SURPASS hiT 70xx series.
• FSP 1500 Broadband CPE: Broadband CPE equipment for E1, FE, GbE, Fiber
Channel and FICON services with optionally redundant STM-16 or STM-4 Uplink
24
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7020: Executive Feature Summary STM-1 or STM-4 uplink included on mainboard MSPP for E1 and Ethernet Services DC Power Supply
slim-line chassis Optional Layer 2 switching EoS features like VCAT, GFP and LCAS 1+1 MSP, SNCP and 2F MS-SPRing@STM-4 Integrated @ TNMS-M and TNMS Core
AC Power Supply
Fig. 20 SURPASS hiT 7020: Executive Feature Summary
SURPASS certified CPE Solutions
Ultra Ultracompact compactBroadband BroadbandCPE CPEfor for Ethernet, SAN and TDM Ethernet, SAN and TDM SDH SDHredundant redundantuplink uplink(STM-16/-4) (STM-16/-4)offers offers QoS QoSand andhighest highestreliability reliability GFP-F GFP-Fand andGFP-T GFP-Tmapping mappingsupport support Use of SFP modules Use of SFP modulesfor forall alloptical opticalI/F I/F Single Singleboard boarddesign design 19” 19”and andETSI ETSIrack rackmounting mounting Desktop and wall mounting option Desktop FSP and 1500 wall mounting option AC ACand andDC DCpowering poweringoption option Integrated into Integrated intoTNMS TNMSCore Core
Fig. 21 SURPASS certified CPE Solutions
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
25
Hardware and functionality
1.7
Network applications
Terminal Multiplexer (TMX) in terminal-to-terminal topologies The following figure illustrates a straightforward point-to-point network with one TMX at the transmitting end and another at the receiving end. At the TMX, the client equipment is connected to the TMX through the tributary interfaces (This can be SDH, PDH or GFP based interfaces).
• A single VC-4 switching matrix in SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements can add/drop up to a total of 2176 x 2176 VC-4s equivalent at any station.
• In addition, a VC-3/-12 switch fabric can also be cascaded with the existing VC-4
switch fabric, if lower order switching granularity is required. This functionality will be available in the next release.
TIP The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not mandatory. Add Drop Multiplexer (ADMX) in Linear and Ring Topologies with Add/drop Function Linear chains as well as rings are supported by SURPASS hiT 70xx series network elements in add/drop equipment configuration. An ADMX is normally used at an intermediate site to add/drop client traffic. In the figure below, an ADMX is located in between two TMX's. At the ADMX, selected traffic is add/drop either at VC-4 or VC-3/-12 levels, while through connected traffic is transparently passed through. Apart from that, if native Ethernet frame handling is required, then the ADMX can also be equipped with GFP based traffic interfaces. TIP The use of MSP between the NE's is preferred for redundancy reasons but not mandatory. In ring configurations MS-SPRing may be used for optional redundancy.
26
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
TMX and ADMX Application TMX
TDM/Data Traffic
TMX TDM/Data Traffic
Working Line
Protection Line
TMX
TDM/Data Traffic
ADMX
TMX
Working Line
Working Line
Protection Line
TDM/Data Traffic
Protection Line
TDM/Data Traffic
Fig. 22 TMX and ADMX Application
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Hardware and functionality
Local Cross Connect (LXC) in STAR Topologies Typically, an operator’s network consists not only of a single ring but multiple rings, with each ring covering different geographical boundary. SURPASS hiT 70xx series can be deployed at the hub of the network as a LXC, routing transit traffic going from one ring to another ring. With a fully 100 % non blocking switching fabric, any crossconnection between line to line, tributary to tributary, tributary to line or line to tributary can be realized.
28
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
LXC Application ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data Traffic
ADMX/TMX TDM/Data Traffic
g r k in Wo ine L
Wo r ki Lin ng e
ADMX/TMX
TDM/Data Traffic
Pr o tect Lin ion e g i k r n Wo ne Li
n tio tec e o r P Lin Wo r k in Line g
LXC
tion tec Pro ine L
ADMX/TMX TDM/Data Traffic
Pr o tec Lin tion e
LXC
Fig. 23 LXC Scenario
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Hardware and functionality
30
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
2
System manuals
Fig. 24 System Manuals
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
31
Hardware and functionality
2.1
Documentation overview
The SURPASS hiT 7080 Customer Documentation comprises the following descriptions and manuals: Document Product description (PD)
Installation and Test Manual (ITMN) Interconnect, Configuration, and Mechanical Assembly (ICMA)
Overview of the entire system. Includes description of features, components, NE types, operating theory, block diagrams, plug-in card descriptions, and detailed technical specifications. Instructions for installing and cabling the equipment. The ITMN also includes the post-installation commissioning procedures. Complete set of drawings that depict rack, subrack, and plug-in card arrangements, as well as electrical and fiber cabling plans.
Commissioning Manual (COMN)
Instructions for commissioning a network element.
Safety Instructions
Instructions and rules for hardware safe handling.
Operating Manual (OMN)
Instructions on the Graphical User Interface of the Local Craft Terminal (LCT).
Troubleshooting Manual (TSMN)
Detailed information to troubleshoot and remedy alarm events.
Open Source Licenses
32
Description
(OSL)
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
OSL
TS-MN
OMN
COMN
ICMA
ITMN
PD
Safety Instr.
Official documentation
Fig. 25 Official documentation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Hardware and functionality
34
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
3
Hardware design and functionality
ENS S IEM
Fig. 26
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Hardware and functionality
3.1 3.1.1
Hardware design Rack Equipment of SURPASS hiT 7080
The equipment frames meet the ETS 300 119 - 2 requirements. The racks are unshielded. In order to minimize the rack spacing of the shelves, the outlets of the optical cables are at the front of the rack beams. This means that the mounting plane of the rack is moved to the back. SURPASS hiT 7080 shall be accommodated in the following ETSI racks:
• Standard ETSI Rack. • Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI Rack. The standard ETSI rack is not recommended to be used because it has limited space for cabling in the front of the cable duct. Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI rack is the recommended rack. The top-most rack slot is used for fitting a terminal panel which supplies equipment with a DC voltage of 48 V or 60 V from the telecommunications center. The cables are connected to the terminals at the top of the fuse panel. The power is fed from the fuse panel to the sub rack(s) using the rack cabling. All electrical lines (connection lines for the telecommunications center, cabling between the sub racks and the rack terminal panel) as well as the FO lines will be routed using the upright rails of the rack and are secured with cable ties.
36
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Fig. 27 SURPASS hiT 7080 with or without extension shelf measurements
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Hardware and functionality
3.1.2
SURPASS hiT 7080 subrack
The shelf is available with various types of mounting brackets for different rack types (Standard ETSI, Nokia Siemens Networks ETSI). The shelf mechanical concept is based on plug-in technique, front access of cards and cable connections. Each shelf consists of:
• Redundant DC Power I/O in the top section • Double row of card slots for installing 33 cards (15 upper row slots and 18 lower row slots)
2 System Controller (SC) slots 1 System Interface (SI) slot 2 HOCC slots 19 Line Card (LC) traffic slots 9 I/O slots which can be flexibly configured for electrical interface I/O cards
• Cable duct for orderly routing of the cables to and from the cards • Fiber duct for orderly routing of the fibers to and from the cards • Two fan units with three fans per unit to cool the system • Backplane with Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) filter • Air filter to protect the electronics and optics from dust and other contaminants • Connector for the grounding of wrist straps
38
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity PWR IO
I O 1
I I O O 2 3
I O 4
H S S / I E 1
19
20
22
23
21
H S / E 1
H S / E 1
H S / E 1
Equipment Core slots HS slots, 20G & LOCC slots
H S I I I I I / O O O O O E 5 6 7 8 9 1
24 25 26 27 28 29
30
31
32
HS slots, 20G backplane w.DS3/STM-1E HS slots, 20G backplane
33
HS slots, 10G backplane w. E1/STM-1E
Fiber Space
HS slots, 20G backplane w. E1/STM-1E H S H H H H H H H O C S S S S S S S C C
H H H H H O S S S S C / / C E E
1
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H S / E
H S / E
H S S C / E
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
IO slots Note: Italic numbers indicate INTERNAL slot numbers HS HS/E HS/E1 HOCC SC PWR IO
18
Fiber Duct Fan Tray Fan Tray Air Filter Tray
= High speed slot (20G) = HS & also support DS3/STM-1E = 10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E = High Order Cross-Connect slot = System Controller slot = Power Supply slot
Fig. 28 hiT 7080 Chassis Slots and Backplane Capacity I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Hardware and functionality
3.1.3
Available Card Types and Slot Compatibility
The table below lists the types of cards supported by hiT 7080 Rel. 4.15
Card type Controller
Cross connection
Card name
Description
SC
System control card for NE configuration
SI – E
System Interface card with EOW
SI
System interface card without EOW
HOCC LOCC
340 Gbps VC-4 switch fabric 2176 x 2176 VC-4 equivalents 20G VC-3 / VC-12 switch fabric 384 x 384 VC-3 / 16384 x 16384 VC-12
2 x STM-64 SDH
PDH
8 x STM-16 8 x STM-4/1 8 x STM-1 E
STM-1 electrical interface card
126 x E1
2 Mbps interface card, 126 x E1
12 x E3/DS3
34/45 Mbps interface card, 12 x E3/DS3
8 x GE / T 1 x 10GE/T Ethernet
Optical Interface Card
Transparent Ethernet interface card
6 x GE + 4 FEGE/A 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2
Layer 2 Ethernet interface card
RPR
2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR
RPR Service interface card
OTN
1 x OUT - 2/UF
OTU interface card
POA (20 dB)
Pre – amplifier card
OA
BOA (13 dBm) BOA (15 dBm)
Boost amplifier card
BOA (18 dBm)
40
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Cards
Slots number
Max
SC
1 and 18
2
SI / SI-E
23
1
HOCC
9 and 10
Notes
2
20 G capacity
6 (W); 7 (P)
2
40 G capacity
5 (W), 6 (W); 7(P), 8 (P)
4
2 x STM-64
2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28
19
* Only port 2 can be used due backplane capacity for these slots.
8 x STM-16
2 to 8, 12 to 17, (24 to 27)* and 28
19
* Only ports 5 to 8 can be used due backplane capacity for these slots.
LOCC
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
No Protection
13 (W) – 30 (I/O); 14 (W) – 31 (I/O); 15 (W) – 32 (I/O); 16 (W) – 33 (I/O) 24 (W) – 19 (I/O); 25 (W) – 20 (I/O); 26 (W) – 21 (I/O); 27 (W) – 22 (I/O)
16
1:N Protection
[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 15 (W) - 32 (I/O); 16 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 17 (P) [24 (W) - 19 (I/O); 25 (W) - 20 (I/O); 26 (W) - 21 (I/O); 27 (W) - 22 (I/O)] - 28 (P)
18
8 x STM-4/-1
8 x STM-1 E + 8 x STM-1 E I/O
No protection
13 (W) – 30 (I/O); 14 (W) – 31 (I/O); 16 (W) – 32 (I/O); 17 (W) – 33 (I/O)
8
1:N Protection
[13 (W) - 30 (I/O); 14 (W) - 31 (I/O); 16 (W) - 32 (I/O); 17 (W) - 33 (I/O)] - 15 (P)
9
No Protection
24 (W) – [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) – [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) – [29 + 30] (I/O); 28 (W) – [31 + 32] (I/O)
12
1:N Protection
{24 (W) – [19 + 20] (I/O); 25 (W) – [21 + 22] (I/O); 27 (W) – [29 + 30] (I/O); 28 (W) – [31 + 32] (I/O)} – 26 (P)
13
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
5 + 6; 6 + 7; 7 + 8; 11 + 12; 12 + 13; 13 + 14
4
1 x 10 GE / T
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
8 x GE / T
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
2 to 8, 12 to 14, 16, 17
4
2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
1 x OTU-2/UF
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
OA
2 to 8, 12 to 17, 24 to 27 and 28
19
12 x E3/DS3 + 12 x E3/DS3 I/O
126 x E1 + 63 x E1 (I/O)
Interworking with Fujitsu DWDM system; not for general availability
Fig. 29 Card Types and Slot Compatibility
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
Hardware and functionality
42
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
LOCC and E1 card protection group rules
Fig. 30 Card protection group rules I
E3/DS3 and STM-1e card protection group rules
Fig. 31 Card protection group rules II
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
43
Hardware and functionality
3.2 3.2.1
Functionality Overview
The SURPASS hiT 7080 as Next Generation SDH system comes with TDM and packet switching fabrics. Due to the flexibility of the design, the hiT 7080 systems can accommodate both VC-4 and VC-12 switching fabric within a single sub-rack. By allowing different TDM fabrics to converge under one common platform, SURPASS hiT 7080 is effectively transformed to a 10 Gbps system with scalable switching granularity from VC-4 right down to VC-12. In addition SURPASS hiT 7080 can also be equipped with L2 switch cards. It switches the frames to its destination port based on the VLAN and Ethernet MAC address.
3.2.2
Block Diagram
The hiT 7080 basic architecture is shown in the block diagram (see Fig. 32). The system is composed of:
• Core Functionalities • SDH Functionalities • Ethernet Functionalities • PDH Functionalities
3.2.3
System Core
The core configuration consists of the following units:
• Chassis and backplane (including Power I/O at the top) • Redundant Fan Units and a Filter Unit at the bottom • Redundant System Control (SC) board • System Interface (SI – E) board • Redundant HOCC board
44
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7080 Block Diagram System Core
20G LOCC
MGT-1/2 MDO/MDI User Channels ALM EOW EXT-1..4 (res.)
System Clock Unit
SI-E System Interface
340G
VC-3/12 Switch
T4-1/2 T3 1/2
20G LOCC
HOCC VC-4 Switch
SC System Controller
VC-3/12 Switch
Ethernet Card
SDH Card
...
Packet Fabric
L2 Ethernet Card
PDH Card
...
...
Fig. 32 Block Diagram for hiT 7080
SURPASS hiT 7080 : System Core PWR IO
I O 1
I O 2
I O 3
I O 4
S I
H S / E 1
H S / E 1
H S / E 1
H S / E 1
H I S I / O O E 5 6 1
19
20
21
22
23
24 25 26 27 28
29
30
I O 7
I I O O 8 9
31
32
Equipment Core slots
33
Fiber Space
H S H H H H H H H O C S S S S S S S C C
H H H H H O S S S S C / / C E E
1
10
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
H S / E
H S / E
H S S C / E
11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Fiber Duct Fan Tray Fan Tray Air Filter Tray
18
HS HS/E HS/E1 HOCC SC PWR IO
=High speed slot (20G) =HS & also support DS3/STM-1E =10G High Speed & E1/STM-1E =High Order Cross-Connect slot =System Controller slot =Power Supply slot
Fig. 33 SURPASS hiT 7080 System Core
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
45
Hardware and functionality
SC card The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system initialization, configuration, monitoring, and maintenance. The SURPASS hiT 7080 can be equipped with redundant SC cards (1 + 1) to provide customers with even higher reliability and stability. While the system is running, configuration information, run time data, and other files are constantly synchronized from the active to the standby card. In the event of a failure for the active card, the standby card will become active and take over all SC functions the previously active card allowing continuous control and full NE functionality. Switch from active to standby cards can be triggered either manually by the operator or automatically in case of failure. The SC card is the main control unit for SURPASS hiT 7080. It performs system initialization, configuration, monitoring and maintenance. A Compact Flash (CF) memory card is equipped in the SC card. The NE database, Management Information Base (MIB), system software and configurations are stored in this nonvolatile memory card, which supports quick recovery in the event of power failure, node failure or unit replacement. On the card faceplate a DB9 (RS232) connector is provided. This interface is used to connect a user terminal to carry out the initial IP address configuration of the network element during the commissioning phase. Four LEDs at the faceplate provide state information (see Fig. 35). Via the Reset button a warm reboot of the SC card can be triggered.
46
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
System Controller SC – 1 DB 9 (RS 232) Serial Serial Line Line interface – 1 reset button • Warm reboot SC – LED • 1 ACT (green) • 1 PWR (green) • 1 FAULT (red) • 1 CF (green) – Pluggable CF card (512MB) • Store MIB and software load
Fig. 34 System Controller SC
SC Card: Faceplate LEDs LED
Color
Status
CF
Green
On Flashing
ACT
Green
FAULT
Green
Red
CF card is available LED test
Off
CF card is not available
On
Working under EPG active state
Flashing
PWR
Description
LED test
Off
Working under standby state (not supported yet)
On
Indicate present internal power supply
Off
Power is not available
On
One or more alarms are present or the card is booting.
Flashing Off
LED test No alarms are present, and card is in service.
Fig. 35 Faceplate LED state meanings
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
47
Hardware and functionality
SI and SI – E cards (System Interface) Both (SI and SI – E) card provides the following main functions:
• TNMS – CT and TNMS Core access • Station clock synchronization access • MDI and MDO access • Alarm outputs • User Channel access • LED TEST, Alarm Cut Off (ACO) and Alarm Suppress (SUP) buttons The difference between the SI and the SI-E card is the EOW function, where is supported in the SI - E card. Interface T3 – 1, T3 – 2, T4 – 1, T4 – 2 MDI 1 – 4, MDI 5 – 8 MDO 1 – 4 MDO 5 – 8 ALM HCOC – 1, HCOC – 2 EOW (Only on SI - E card)
4 x RJ 45 connectors for four station clock interfaces, T3 stands for clock in (2 Mbps or 2 MHz) and T4 stands for clock out (2 Mbps or 2 MHz). 2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete Input (MDI) ports. MDI's are used to read the status of external alarm-points. Both the MDI description and severities are configurable on the management system. 2 x RJ 45 connectors to provide eight Miscellaneous Discrete Output (MDO) ports. MDO's are used to drive the external devices. MDO can be activated or deactivated manually by the management system. RJ 45 alarm output interface, providing four alarm outputs, including two audio and two visible alarm outputs. 2 x RJ 45 connectors for two extended user channels, two V.11 ports in total. RJ 45 connector for E1 and E2. There are a maximum of 64 EOW channels (32 x E1 and 32 x E2). One to one or multiple user calls can be performed through this interface.
MGT – 1, MGT – 2
2 x RJ 45 connectors for network management interfaces.
EXT – 1, EXT – 2, EXT – 3, EXT – 4
4 x RJ 45 connectors for real extension shelf management. (These ports are reserved for future use.)
F1 – 1, F1 – 2 DEBUG
48
Description
2 x RJ 45 connectors for two F1 user channels, two V.11 ports in total. Mini USB type port for module debugging.
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SI (System Interface card) and
System Interface with EOW: SI – E SI-E (System Interface card with EOW) Buttons: .- LED Test .- ACO (Alarm Cutt – off) .- SUP (Alarm supression) LED’s: .- PWR (green color) .- FAULT (red color) .- CR – Critical alarms (red color) - on: one or more critical communication alarms are present - flash: one or more critical non – communications are present - off: no critical alarms are present .- MJ – Major alarm (orange color) .- MN – Minor alarms (yellow color)
LED Description
Buttons
PWR
LED TEST
CR
Interfaces: .- Mini USB .- Two MGM ports For TNMS and LCT sumultaneos access .- EOW access (Only available on SI – E card) .- Two ports T3 and two ports T4 for Station Clock Synchronization .- Eight MDI’s access (two ports) .- Eight MDO’s access (two ports) .- Alarm output .- Two User Channels .- Two HCOC interfaces .- Four interfaces for extension Shelf
HCOC2
TEST
LED test button
T3-1 T3-2
T4-1
T4-2
ALM HCOC1
EOW
MDO1-4
MDI1-4
ACO
Alarm cut off button. The alarm outputs connected to the rack-top alarming module will be cut off by pushing the button one time. System indicators (critical, major, and minor LEDs) on the NE will not be suppressed.
SUP
Alarm suppress button. When the button isEXT-3 pushed, the existing (visible critical/major/minor LED MGT-1 EXT-1 F1-1 F1-2 alarmsMDO5-8 MDI5-8 indicators) on the SI card will not be shown system and the rack-top alarm module when the MGT-2 EXT-2 on the EXT-4 MJ MN ACO SUP button is pushed until the next alarm occurs.
DEBUG
FAULTY
Fig. 36 SI and SI – E cards
BUTTONS
LED’s
SI and SI-E faceplate cards
INTERFACES EOW
Fig. 37 SI and SI - E faceplate cards
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Hardware and functionality
HOCC card SURPASS hiT 7080 supports 340 Gbps (2176 x 2176 VC-4s) high order fabric capacity that can interconnect AU4's between any SDH and Ethernet port accessing the system. The switch fabric provides non – blocking switching of traffic at VC-4, VC-4-4c, VC-4-16c and VC-4-64c levels. Two HOCC slots are available which support HOCC card 1 + 1 protection. LOCC SURPASS hiT 7080 supports a 20 Gbps low order switching capacity on one card that can interconnect TU-12s and TU-3s between any SDH and Ethernet port accessing the system. The switch fabric provides non-blocking switching of traffic at VC-12 and VC-3 levels. For added LOCC capacity the SURPASS hiT 7080 can use two LOCC working cards together to support a 40 Gbps capacity. Upgrade from 20 Gbps to 40 Gbps LOCC capacity can be done without traffic interruption. SURPASS hiT 7080 provides up to four HS slots which support LOCC card 1 + 1 protection for both 20 Gbps and 40 Gbps applications. The LOCC card can be equipped in the following manner: Protected: • 20 G LOCC: slot 6 working and slot 7 protection • 40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6 working and slot 7 and 8 protection TIP The LOCC can be upgraded from 20 G to 40 G without any traffic interruption by adding new LOCC cards to slot 5 and 8. Unprotected: • 20 G LOCC: slot 6 • 40 G LOCC: slot 5 and 6
50
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Cross – connection arquitecture
Fig. 38 Cross-connection architecture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Hardware and functionality
Power Distribution The Breaker Panel is mounted on top of the rack. Four circuit breakers (20 A) are used for the hiT 7080 shelf in the rack (two for working power supply and two for protection power supply). Two pre-manufactured cables with fast-on terminals are used to interconnect to the Power Input connectors at the top of the subracks. Overvoltage protection and EMI filtering is provided by the Power I/O section. Input Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O section indicate that the corresponding power supply is on. Equipment plug-in-units are equipped with a power converter (decentralized power supply) that provides all necessary supply voltages to the specific card. The power converter is operated from two independent battery feeds.
FAN Two fan units are used to cool the system. Each fan unit is equipped with three fans. The state of fans is monitored by the system. The FAULT LED on the front panel indicates the fault state of any fan in the fan unit. WARNING The system can not work without any fan unit.
TIP The system can still work normally within 16 hours if only one fan unit has failed. The action of the fan unit replacement must be finished within 2 minutes. Filter unit One filter unit is used to protect the main shelf from environmental dust. A state supervision of the filter unit is not provided by the system. WARNING An excessively dirty filter unit will reduce cooling airflow.
TIP The filter unit replacement must be treated as a periodic maintenance procedure to ensure that the fans are able to sustain optimum shelf operating temperature.
52
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Power Distribution
RET/RED -48V/BLUE RET/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
RET/RED -48V/BLUE RET/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
WORKING
PROTECTING
RETURN/RED -48V/BLUE
RETURN/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
RETURN/RED -48V/BLUE
Power(A)
RETURN/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
Power(B)
Fig. 39 Power Distribution
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Hardware and functionality
3.2.4
PDH Interface Cards
12 x E3/DS3 (W/P) Interface Card The 12 x E3/DS3 interface card can be divided into two modules:
• 12 x E3/DS3 Function Card (processing card) • 12 x E3/DS3 I/O Card with 75 Ohms impedance CC4 connectors Each E3/DS3 port can be configured as E3 or DS3 transmission mode. The E3/DS3 (W/P) card must be installed accompanied by its I/O card. Each E3/DS3 signal is mapped into a Low Order VC-3 and forwarded to line interface for transmission. There are 24 CC4 connectors and every E3/DS3 interface uses two CC4 connectors. For I/O cards, there is only one LED PWR, which indicates the status of the card’s power. 126 x E1/R (W/P) Interface Card This card can be divided into two modules as following:
• 126 × E1/R (W/P) Function Card • 63× E1/R I/O (75 or 120 Ohms) Interface Card The 126 x E1/R (W/P) card is used in combination with two 63 x E1 I/O boards. The connector is based 2 mm connector. The board on the left side handles the first 63 ports and the board on the right side handles ports 64 until 126. In 126 x E1/R cards, any one of the E1 ports could be used as the timing source, but the maximum four ports can be selected as the same time. The retiming function can be enabled or disabled for any of the 126 E1 ports on the LCT or the TNMS. With retiming function enable, the transmitter eliminates wander and jitter in the incoming clock. While the rate of the outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal is normally equal to the rate of the 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal going into the SDH network, occasionally this relationship disappears. A retiming function is necessary for suppression of jitter and wander that the 2 Mbit/s signal suffers during transmission in SDH and which makes the signal useless for carrying the synchronous frequency to the PDH domain. To retime an outgoing 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal, means simply to retime this signal with the internal clock of the multiplexer equipment in which the desynchronization takes place. This can be done by reading the recovered 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz signal into an elastic store and timing the output of the elastic store with the system clock. When the device is set in the retiming mode all jitter and wander due to the multiplexing or demultiplexing process in the transmission is eliminated. The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports 1:4 protection for the E1 card against the equipment failure and carrier class Equipment protection switching.
54
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT hiT 7080 PDH Cards Cards SURPASS PDH Cards
Core Cards CTRL & OH Access
SCOH W
12 x E3/DS3 I/O
12 x 34/45 M electrical ports
12 x E3/DS3
1:N Card Portection
P
63 x E1 I/O
System
SI
Interface
63 x E1 I/O 126 x E1
126 x 2M electrical ports 1:N Card Protection
High Order Switch Frabric 340 G @ VC-4
HOCC W
and SETS
SDH Cards
P
(Card Protection) Low Order Switch Frabric
Ethernet Cards
LOCC W
20 G @ VC-3/-12
P
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 40 Surpass hiT 7080: PDH Cards
PDH Cards Faceplates 12 x E3/DS3
12 x E3/DS3 I/O
CC4 connector
126 x E1
63 x E1 I/O
2 mm connector
Fig. 41 PDH Cards Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Hardware and functionality
3.2.5
SDH Interface Cards
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides the following SDH interfaces: 8 × STM-1 E interface Card This card can be divided in two parts:
• 8 x STM-1E Function Card. • 8 x STM-1E IO Card with Ohm impedance CC4 connector. The 8 x STM-1E (W/P) card is used in combination with 8 x STM-1E IO cards. The SURPASS hiT 7080 chassis supports two groups of 1: 4 protection for the STM1E card against the equipment failure and carrier class equipment protection switching. Any pair of STM-1 electrical ports in same or different 8 x STM-1E (W/P) cards can be set to support SNCP/I, SNCP/N, MSP, EOW and DCC (including OSI-light, GRE tunnel, third-party DCC transparency, etc.). 8 × STM-4/-1 The 8 x STM-4/-1 card provides eight STM-4/1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957, or eight electrical STM-1 ports compliant with ITU-T G.703. The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-4 or STM-1 optical SFP modules or STM-1 electrical SFP modules. Each port on this card can be configured to STM-4 or STM-1 (default) mode through TNMS CT or TNMS Core. It is possible to mix freely the different SFP modules within one traffic card. The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection. 8 × STM-16 This card provides eight STM-16 ports compliant with ITU-T G.957 and ITU-T G.695. The card can be equipped with up to eight STM-16 optical SFP modules. It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card. The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection. 2 × STM-64 This card provides two STM-64 ports compliant with ITU-T G.691 and Transport System Generic Requirements (TSGR) GR-1377-Core. The card can be equipped with a maximum of two STM-64 optical XFP modules. It is possible to mix the different XFP modules within one traffic card. The card supports 1+1 and 1: N MSP protection, SNCP protection and 2F MSSPRing protection.
56
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7080 SDH Cards PDH Cards
Core Cards SDH Cards CTRL & OH Access
SCOH P
8 x STM-1 E
SI
System Interface
8 x STM-1 electrical ports
8 x STM-1 I/O
W
8 x STM-4/1
1+1, 1:N MSP and SNCP
S F P
340 G @ VC-4
8 x STM-1 electrical 1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-4
High Order Switch Frabric
8 x STM-1 optical or
HOCC
8 x STM-16
W
and SETS
S F P
P
8 x STM-16 optical 1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-16
(Card Protection)
2 x STM-64
Low Order Switch Frabric
LOCC
20 G @ VC-3/-12
S F P
2 x STM-64 optical 1+1, 1:N MSP or 2F-MS-SPRing for STM-64
Ethernet Cards
W P
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 42 SURPASS hiT 7080: SDH Cards
SDH Cards Faceplates 8 x STM-1 E Card
8 x STM-1 I/O Card
CC4 connector
8 x STM-4/1 Card
8 x STM-16 Card
SFP
LINK
2 x STM-64 Card
XFP
LINK
Fig. 43 SDH Cards Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
57
Hardware and functionality
3.2.6
Data Interface Cards
SURPASS hiT 7080 supports the following data service cards: 8 × GE/T The card provides eight Gigabit Ethernet optical interfaces (SFP) on the client side which only supports transparent transmission function. GE signal is encapsulated into GFP packets and then mapped into mixed VC-4-Xv and VC-3-Xv payload for transmission. The total bandwidth is up 10 G. All ports can work at a wire speed simultaneously. Additionally, the first two ports can be configured working as standard 1 Gbit/s Ethernet or 1.0625 Gbps Fiber Channel working mode. When these ports are working as 1Gbit/s FC, GFP-T will be used. It is possible to mix the different SFP modules within one traffic card. Other detail features are listed below:
• VCAT supported • LCAS supported, according to ITU-T G.7042 • Differential delay per VCG group tolerance up to 128 ms 6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A The card provides 6 x GE optical SFP interfaces (or electrical SFP interfaces) and 4 electrical 10/100/1000 M auto – negotiation interfaces (RJ-45 interface). The Layer main functions supported by this card are as follows:
• LAN / WAN ports aggregation. • Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frames structure supported by the FE/GE ports.
• Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC addresses. • VLAN and double VLAN tagging, providing increased number of VLANs. • Rapid Spanning Tree (802.1 w) and Multiple Spanning Tree (802.1s), dramatically reducing restoration time.
• Providing per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is from 128 Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.
• Providing per VLAN rate limiting function. The rate range of each VLAN is from
128 Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.
• Providing 802.1p QoS/CoS based on Ethernet port and/or VLAN.
58
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7080 Ethernet Cards PDH Cards
Core Cards
SDH Cards
CTRL &
SCOH
OH Access
Ethernet Cards
W P
SI
System Interface
High Order Switch Frabric
HOCC
340 G @ VC-4
8 x GE / T
S F P
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE / A
S F P
2 x GE + 12 x FE / RPR
S F P
1 x 10 GE / T
X F P
8 x GE electrical or optical ports (2 x FC) optical 6 x GE optical / electrical and 4 x FE/GE electrical 2 x GE electrical or optical 6 x FE electrical interfaces
W
and SETS
P
(Card Protection)
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
Low Order
LOCC
Switch Frabric
1 x 10 GE optical 1 x 10 GE optical
XFP S F P
10 x GE optical or electrical
W
20 G @ VC-3/-12
P
(Card Protection)
Amplifier Cards
Fig. 44 SURPASS hiT 7080: Ethernet cards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Hardware and functionality
• Layer 2 multicast functions, including static provisioned multicast and IGMP Snooping multicast functions.
• LCAS supported • GFP encapsulation (ITU - T G.7041/Y.1303) The card support 10 GE LAN ports and 12 GE + 24 FE WAN ports. Each 100M WAN port can be mapped to VC-12-Xv (X = 1...46) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1...3) via GFP, mixed VC-12-Xv and VC-3-Xv is supported and also LCAS. Each 1000M WAN port can be mapped to VC-3-Xv (X = 1...21) or VC-4-Xv (X = 1...7) via GFP, mixed VC-3-Xv and VC-4-Xv is supported and also LCAS. The total bandwidth is up 64 x VC-4 (10 G). 2 × GE + 12 × FE RPR The card provides RPR function on SDH. There are 12 x 10/100 M Base – T interfaces (RJ-45) and 2 x GE optical / electrical SFP interfaces on the client side. This module supports L2 switching, RPR MAC, GFP, virtual concatenation and LCAS. There are two WAN ports on the network side. The bandwidth of each port is 8 x VC-4. The total bandwidth is up to 2.5 G The Layer 2 functions supported by this module are:
• VLAN and double tagging, providing increased member of VLANs • A shareable memory space for both FE and GE interfaces on each card • Access Control List (ACL) based on MAC address • Rate limiting per port / VLAN: the rate range of each port is from 64 Kbps to 100
Mbps (FE) or 64 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE) and the rate provisioning granularity is 64 Kbps. Each FE and GE interfaces provides enough buffers to support burst data traffic transmission and consequently make traffic congestion under control.
RPR function:
• SDH especial reuse. • Source weighted fairness (Class B and C traffic only) • Handle three classes of Services (Class A, B and C). Class A traffic can occupy up to 50 % of total RPR bandwidth and only the class A traffic supports strict order transmission.
• Per port based service rate limiting function: The rate of each port is from 128
Kbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.
• Per VLAN based service rate limiting function: The rate range of each VLAN is from 128 Mbps to 100 Mbps (FE) or 128 Mbps to 1 Gbps (GE), and the rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps.
• RPR layer protection: steering or wrapping protection (user provisional). 60
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Ethernet Faceplate Cards 8 x GE / T
SFP
LINK
6 x GE + 4 FEGE / A
RJ 45 connector 2 x GE + 12 x FE / RPR
Fig. 45 Ethernet Faceplate Cards I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
Hardware and functionality
• Topology discovery • FE ports support auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3 and Ethernet II frame structure
• GFP encapsulation according with ITU-T G.7041 / Y.1303 • Virtual concatenation (VC-4-Xv; VC-3-Xv and VC-12-Xv) and LCAS functionality • SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms. 1 × 10GE/T This card provides one 10 Gigabit Ethernet optical interface with the transparent transmission function (P2P). The total bandwidth is up to 64 x VC-4 (10G). One VCG groups will be supported and it can be mapped into VC-4-Xv (X = 1...64). GFP-F encapsulation is used for Ethernet frame. Summary of key functions:
• The 10 GE ports support flow control and it can be configurable (enable/ disable). • Support LCAS. • Performance monitoring function. • The 10 GE port can be transmitted full speed and full duplex mode. • Admin Shutdown / ALS / Port Monitoring functions supported. Admin Shutdown
will turn off the port. All traffic on this port will be blocked. All received traffic will be dropped and no signal will be sent out when it is shutdown.
1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2 The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 is a 20 G layer 2 Ethernet card with a 40 G switch capacity which is composed of a mother and daughter card together (occupying 2 physical slots in the NE) providing 11 LAN ports and 80 WAN ports.
• Front panel interfaces: – One 10 GE optical XFP interface (mother card). – Ten GE optical or electrical SFP interfaces (daughter card).
• Backplane side: – 40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 GE mother card. – 40 x WAN ports sharing up to 10 G (64 x VC-4) for the 10 x GE daughter card. The 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE/L2 card supports L2 switching, GFP, high/low order virtual concatenation, LCAS, and LAN / WAN port aggregation. Two WAN ports (VCG 1 and VCG 41) can be configured with up to 10 Gbps of bandwidth using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 64) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 192). The other 78 WAN ports (VCG 2 - 40 and VCG 42 -
62
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Ethernet Faceplate cards 1 x 10 GE / T
XFP 1 x 10 GE + 10 x GE / L2
SFP
Fig. 46 Ethernet Faceplate Cards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Hardware and functionality
80) can be configured with up to 2 Gbps using VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 14) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 42). The main functions supported by this card are as follows:
• LAN / WAN port aggregation • Multicast IGMP snooping • VLAN and double VLAN tagging • VLAN translation • Link Aggregation • 128k MAC addresses (shared among dynamic, static, and multicast addresses) • ACL based on MAC addresses • Multiple policing options including: CIR; EIR; PIR; CBS; EBS. • Priority settings according to: • DiffServ value in incoming frame • Transparent transport of MPLS frames • Per port rate limiting function: The rate range of each port is as follows: – 128 Kbps to 100 Mbps for FE – 128 Kbps to 1 Gbps for GE – 2.3 Mbps to 10 Gbps for 10 GE
• The rate provisioning granularity is 128 Kbps for FE and GE; 1 Mbps for 10 GE • Per VLAN rate limiting function. • Auto negotiation, flow control, IEEE 802.3, and Ethernet II frame structure supported by the FE/GE/10 GE ports
• GFP encapsulation (ITU-T G.7041/Y.1303) • VC-4-Xv (X = 1 to 7), VC-3-Xv (X = 1 to 21), and LCAS function supported by the GE WAN port
• SDH and Ethernet performance monitoring and alarms • GMRP function • GVRP function • MSTP function
64
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
SURPASS hiT 7080 Amplifier Cards PDH Cards SDH Cards
Core Cards
Ethernet Cards
CTRL &
Amplifier Cards
SCOH
OH Access
RX
POA 20 dB System Interface
SI
STM-16
TX
BOA 13 dBm
STM-1/4/16/64
Switch Frabric 340 G @ VC-4
HCOCC
and SETS
TX
BOA 15 dBm
STM-1/4/16
W
(Card Protection)
P
TX
BOA 18 dBm
STM-1/4/16
Fig. 47 SURPASS hiT 7080: Amplifier cards
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Hardware and functionality
3.2.7
Optical Amplifier Cards
This OA (Optical Amplifier) module provides uni-directional single optical amplifier function with optical performance monitoring capabilities. This module is designed to compensate losses in the entire C band as Booster or Pre-amplifier in the Metro networks. The following variants are available:
• Optical Booster Amplifier 18 dBm • Optical Booster Amplifier 15 dBm • Optical Booster Amplifier 13 dBm • Optical Pre-Amplifier 20 dB The EDFA (Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier) sub-module is the core building block for the Optical Amplifier cards. It provides optical signal amplification function. With integrated fast digital circuit and advanced software, the EDFAs can be configured to operate at APC, ACC or AGC mode.
• APC (automatic power control) mode: In this mode, the optical output power is maintained constant by adjusting the laser pump current to compensate minor changes in OA input power, component aging, and temperature variation. This mode is mainly used in Booster application.
• AGC (automatic gain control) mode: In this mode, the OA provides constant
power gain by adjusting the pump laser current in order to compensate minor changes in component aging and temperature. This mode is mainly used in preamplifier application.
• ACC (automatic current control) mode: In this mode, the pump laser current is maintained constant.
These modes can be set through software according to customer’s requirements. In addition, other significant parameters that need to be pre-set are the Input optical power low threshold, the Output optical power low threshold and the Low and High temperature threshold for output power shutdown.
3.2.8
Dispersion Compensation Module
The dispersion compensation module can be used in conjunction with the STM-16 interfaces in order to achieve large distances. The DCM is a 1U high external module that can be installed in the same rack as the hiT7080. The module name is:
• Disp. Comp. Module G.652, 40km, 6dB
66
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
Application Example for BOA, POA and DCM
≤180km 18dBm 18dBm BOA BOA
Tx Tx
20dBm 20dBm POA POA
DCM DCM 40km 40km
Rx Rx
STM-16
DCM DCM 40km 40km
Rx Rx
20dBm 20dBm POA POA
18dBm 18dBm BOA BOA
Tx Tx
Fig. 48 SURPASS hiT 7080: Example for BOA, POA and DCM
hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates PWR
POA 20dB LINK
FAULT PWR
BOA 13 dBm LINK
FAULT PWR
BOA 15 dBm LINK
FAULT PWR
BOA 18 dBm LINK
FAULT
Fig. 49 hiT 7080: Amplifier Card Faceplates
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
67
Hardware and functionality
3.2.9
SFP/XFP Modules
In hiT 7080 for the optical interface units (i.e. STM-1/-4/-16/-64 Interfaces and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces) pluggable optical modules are used.
• SFP modules are used for STM-1/-4/-16 as well as for GbE interfaces. • XFP modules are used for STM-64 interfaces. There are no restrictions for equipping the boards with the SFP/XFP Modules, any combinations of “unequipped” and all available modules are possible. There is also the possibility to use STM-1el SFP Modules and electrical Gigabit Ethernet SFP Modules in respective optical interface units.
68
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Hardware and functionality
GBIC, XFP and SFP modules
Fig. 50 GBIC, XFP and SFP modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Hardware and functionality
70
FT52423EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Operating terminal
Contents 1 1.1 1.2 2 2.1 2.2 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 4
System manuals Documentation overview 1.2 Online help system General features Introduction Functional overview Getting started What you need to navigate Basic operations Connecting to the Network Element Exercises
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 4 6 9 10 12 19 20 28 42 53
1
Operating terminal
2
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
1
System manuals
Fig. 1
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Operating terminal
1.1
Documentation overview
The documentation of the TNMS – CT (Telecommunication Network Management System Craft Terminal) comprises the following descriptions and manuals:
The User Manual (UMN) The User Manual (UMN) consists of the following main chapters:
• Information This chapter provides an overview of the applications, system architecture, features and functions of TNMS – CT.
• Installation This chapter contains instructions on installing the TNMS – CT software.
• Operation This chapter contains a general description of the TNMS – CT user interfaces as well as the necessary background information. Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) The content of the Graphical User Interface Manual is identical to the complete Online Help, but converted to a printable PDF file. In addition, every GUI-related help window is supplemented by a sample screenshot. All TNMS CT manuals are available on CD-ROM, and can be ordered in English from SIEMENS Technical Sales. In order to be able to read the PDF files properly, you need
Windows®
UNIX®
Windows 95/98
SUN Solaris 2.5 or higher
Windows NT/2000/XP and Acrobat Reader (Version 8 is part of installation package) with search function.
4
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Official documentation
U M N
G U I M N
Fig. 2 Official documentation
Documentation on CD-ROM
UMN (pdf)
GUIMN (pdf)
Acrobat Reader
Fig. 3 Documentation on CD-ROM
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Operating terminal
1.2
1.2
Online help system
You can use the online help system that is provided with the TNMS – CT software to receive information about all the window contents and menus. The Contents, Index and Find tabs enable the online help to be searched quickly and conveniently. You may also display essential steps of important operating sequences via the help table of contents. Individual help topics can be printed, and context-sensitive help texts called up directly from the user interface. Internet explorer setting To view the help pages normally, set the internet explorer as follows: Tools tab Æ Internet Options window Æ Advanced tab Æ Security setting Æ select Allow active content to run in files on My Computer Help can be requested in any of the following ways: 1. After calling up Help from the menu bar, you can search for topics via the table of contents, via the index or via a full-text search. 2. Clicking the Help button in the current window, displays information about the window contents. 3. Pressing displays information about the contents of the window that is active at the moment. TIP The Online Help gives detailed information on the tasks that are to be performed with TNMS – CT. It also provides detailed description about the individual windows, fields, and icons used in TNMS – CT.
6
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
3
2 1
Fig. 4 TNMS – CT: Online Help
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Operating terminal
8
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
2
General features
Fig. 5
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Operating terminal
2.1
Introduction
TNMS – CT is a common platform solution for different Network Element (NE) types. This management system basically consists of PC hardware (standard PC) and an Operation, Administration and Maintenance (OAM) PC software, which provides a high performance supervision and control tool using the internal supervision and control software implemented in the Network Elements. TNMS – CT is a transparent software platform for SDH and WDM network elements using:
• QD2 • QST • Q3 • SNMP telegram protocols. TNMS – CT provides access to network elements via:
• Network interface (Ethernet) or • Serial line interface (RS232) (not supported by hiT 7080). TNMS – CT allows local as well as remote operation and control. It is possible to open more than one NE application at the same time. This way there is the additional possibility to have a graphical network view, concerning fault detection and network management. The TNMS – CT menu items and dialogues allow the supported communication channels to be set up. The network element to be operated is selected by a simple procedure, adapted to the requirements of the connected communication channel. TNMS – CT enables addresses to be assigned to the network elements. The program icons for these applications are used to present the assigned network elements in the network view.
10
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT (Craft Terminal) TNMS CT Server
Remote client
WAN / Internet WAN / Internet
TNMS CT Server
Remote client
LAN LCT
hiT 7500 hiT 7300 LCT
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
STM-16 BSHR/4
STM-16 BSHR/4 hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 7070
MSP 1+1
Fig. 6 TNMS – CT (Craft Terminal)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Operating terminal
2.2 2.2.1
Functional overview Client/server Architecture
TNMS – CT is a scalable single – user system with a client / server architecture comprising several industry standard PCs with the MS Windows 2000 or XP operating system and various software applications. The TNMS – CT software comprises of a Client and a Server component.
• Client component: It provides a network management user interface. Via this GUI all TNMS – CT management functions, e.g. invoking of element managers, are available.
• Server component: It holds the EML packages and the Net Server frame, which provides the environment for running EML servers, DCN connectors and NE controllers.
Client and Server software components can be installed on one PC as well as on separate PC's.
12
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT: Client/server architecture Remote client
TNMS CT Server
TNMS CT Client & Server components
TNMS CT Client component
WAN / Internet WAN / Internet
TNMS CT Server
Local client
TNMS CT Server component
LAN hiT 7500 hiT 7300
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
STM-16 BSHR/4
STM-16 BSHR/4 hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
Fig. 7 TNMS – CT: Client/Server architecture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Operating terminal
2.2.2
LCT and NCT modes
Depending on the needs, two different modes are available for TNMS – CT. LCT Mode: The Local Craft Terminal (LCT) is used for local management and commissioning of network elements. The LCT can communicate with a maximum of 50 network elements. Up to three element managers may be open at the same time only. NCT Mode: The Network Craft Terminal (NCT) is used for local or remote management of network elements. In addition to the LCT functions, the monitoring of all the alarms reported from each accessible network element is allowed. The NCT can communicate with a maximum of 150 network elements (including alarm monitoring). Up to 50 element managers may be open at the same time only. TIP Each mode requires its own license key. Furthermore, the installation routines are slightly different from each other.
WARNING Some NEs, such as QST and QD2 NEs, allow the connection to several management system levels. If a management system like TNMS Core enforces write access on a network element, it will override the TNMS – CT write access.
14
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT: LCT and NCT modes The NCT mode supports the daily work of a service technician in a software tool optimized way • Supports of up to 150 NE’s at the same time without restriction of the Network topology complexity • Max. 50 open element managers at the same time • Local or remote Client login capability is supported • Network Alarm list or Network Alarm logs are supported
The LCT mode provides the service technician with a basic function access to the network element (NOT SUPPORTED BY hiT 7080 !)
NCT
Network interface (Ethernet)
• Supports of up to 50 NE’s at the same time without restriction of the Network topology complexity • Max. 3 open element managers at the same time • Elementary requirements for NE commissioning • One Client and one Server on the same PC
Metro-Access STM-1/4/16
LCT Serial line interface (RS232) or Ethernet
Fig. 8 LCT and NCT modes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Operating terminal
2.2.3
Graphical user interface
• The TNMS – CT specific software package allows the creation of a graphical
representation of the network such as a geographical arrangement of the NE symbols as an example.
• Each NE is represented on the GUI by an individual icon. • The NE – specific Element Manager can be activated via mouse click on the NE symbol.
• It is possible to open more than one Element Manager Application at the same time.
• Program control and command entry can be performed by means of the mouse
and / or keyboard using pull – down menus and the deposition of popup menus, activated via right mouse button click.
• All menus and actions, which can be activated via popup menu, are also selectable via pull – down menu – titles.
• Menu titles and menu options, which are frequently used, can also be selected via function keys.
The operator is guided through the program by menus. One has no need to learn complex command syntax. Furthermore the program offers mechanisms as filtering or sorting of information and offers support through help functions.
16
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Graphical User Interface (GUI)
Fig. 9 TNMS – CT GUI
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Operating terminal
18
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
3
Getting started LCT
LCT NCT
T SC TNM
Fig. 10
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Operating terminal
3.1 3.1.1
What you need to navigate Starting TNMS – CT server
TNMS – CT Server is started automatically on system startup, before any user is logged on. Once it has been started, a connection to all configured and activated network elements is established and their data is uploaded. An icon is displayed in the Windows 2000/XP taskbar. Once the Server has started, it is always active. Moreover, terminating the Client does not result in stopping the Server and disconnecting from the NEs.
3.1.2
Starting a TNMS – CT client session
Once the TNMS CT Server has been started, TNMS – CT Client can be started from the Computers Desktop: 1.
From "Start" menu
or 2.
using the "CT Client" icon.
3.1.3
Working with the mouse
Both the left and the right mouse button are used when working with the GUI. The left mouse button (LMB) may be used for the following actions:
• Select a context menu from the top bar of a window. • Select a menu item. • Select a function using the features available in a window (buttons, selection menus etc.).
• Confirm an action (e.g. Apply). A great number of operations within both interfaces can only be invoked via context menus. A context menu is called by clicking an object of the graphical user interface with the right mouse button (RMB). This displays a selection of menu items which are relevant for the selected object in the given situation.
20
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Starting a TNMS – CT client session
2
1
TNMS CT Server Is running
Fig. 11 Starting a TNMS – CT client session
3.1.4
Working with the keyboard
The TNMS – CT user interface is driven by context menus (click on objects in the user interface with the right mouse button) and therefore cannot be operated without a mouse. Therefore this manual refers throughout to mouse control. However, it is possible to use the keyboard to perform the actions listed in the main menus. Hold down the key and press the underlined letters for the menu items you want to use. For example: Main window Æ Fault menu Æ Alarm List... entry = +, . If there are no underlined letters visible, please press . To open a context menu you can also use +. By using the key it is possible to jump between the different window panels. In the remaining chapters of this manual it is presumed that the operator works with a mouse.
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Operating terminal
3.1.5
Login procedure of TNMS – CT client
TIP Before you can obtain the user access to the TNMS – CT Client the related TNMS – CT server has to be started. Login as follows: (Use the tabulator key to toggle between the fields in the Login dialog field.)
• Enter the name or the IP address of the TNMS – CT server. By default the name of the TNMS – CT server, at which the last login took place, will be displayed. TIP When the TNMS – CT server, at which you want to log on, is on the local system, the server-name is 'localhost'.
• Enter a valid user name and password. By default the name of the last logged on user is displayed. Your TNMS administrator gives you your user name and password.
TIP When entering the user name details please distinguish between the upper and lower case letters! To protect your password, it is displayed asterisks (*) while you are entering it.
• Click on 'Login' button or press the enter key. • In case the Advisory window is displayed, please confirm the advisory message with "OK".
• You will be logged on. Advisory window The Advisory window consists of company specific message for the employed operators displayed at login. The window has its own toolbar:
• Click "OK" to confirm the message. • Click "Cancel" to exit the Advisory window and abort the login. The following information is provided in this window:
• "Last Login" Displays the date and time of the operator's last login. • "Advisory Message" Displays a message to be configured under Security Settings window.
22
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Login procedure
1
2
3
Fig. 12 Login procedure
Advisory Window
Fig. 13 Advisory Window
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
23
Operating terminal
3.1.6
TNMS – CT client: main window
The TNMS – CT GUI gives access to all functions for supervision, operation, configuration and maintenance of the network. The set of functions available to each individual operator depends on the operator’s user class that is defined by the administrator. Via the TNMS – CT GUI you can also start the element manager applications (e.g. the EM of an SMA16/4 or the MSN Manager) to control and configure individual network elements. The TNMS Client user interface consists of the following parts: 1. Menu bar: Menu bar of the TNMS – CT main window contains the number of the menu items. When you click on one of these menu items, the pull – down menu specific to the menu item opens. 2. Toolbar: The toolbar runs along the top edge of the main window above the working area. Clicking on one of these buttons with the left mouse button provides quick and particularly easy access to certain frequently used functions. 3. Status bar: The status bar runs along the bottom of the main window. It gives information on the operating states and displays important messages, such as alarms, in short form.
24
Notification Area
A short help text for the currently selected window, menu entry or toolbar button.
Operator
User ID of the currently logged in operator.
Server Name
Name of the connected Server.
Server State
State of the TNMS – CT Server, i.e. idle, starting up, shutting down or running.
Time
Time display, i.e. local, GMT or CST.
Alarms
Alarm severities and counters for each severity, i.e. indeterminate, critical, major, minor, warning (from left to right)
SSL
Secure connection to the server is established.
Data Semaphore
Open transactions, i.e. no open transactions (green), open transactions (red).
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT Client: Main Window 1 2 4
5
Server Name Notification area
3
Operator
SSL
Server State
Time
Alarms
Data Semaphore
Fig. 14 TNMS – CT client: main window
4. Network View: The Network View provides graphical representation of your network. Orientation within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap. For example, you can attach the picture of a city map to be displayed in the background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map according to their real location. Moreover, the Network View offers quick access to information concerning single NEs (e.g. current access state, alarm state). Each item of the Network View offers an individual context menu. 5. Working Area: This is the main area where the operator can arrange the individual work place.
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
25
Operating terminal
3.1.7
Representation of the network
The "Network View" contains the TNMS – CT network map. On the network map the network elements can be placed according to the network topology with the help of a background bitmap. Additionally, links can be drawn between the NEs and port connections can be set up. The network element icon is used to indicate the type of the network element. Different states of the network element are shown by the extra symbols of the network element icon. A network element in the maintenance mode does not send notifications. This state will be indicated with a wrench symbol on the network element icon. In addition to the display of the network element states the NE icon is also used to show the alarm status and alarm severity of the received alarms.
26
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Network Element states Icon
Write Access
NE in the maintenance mode.
Graphical presentation of the active alarm(s).
unknown no write access external management system/LCT NEC EM of this TNMS CT
Port connection.
EM of this TNMS CT and NEC Icon
Operational State
Access State
enabled
ready
disabled
ready
unknown
disconnected
unknown
failure
unknown
starting up
unknown
shutting down
unknown
The NE is deactivated in the DCN Management.
init failed
The NE has not finished its initialisation successfully and is inoperable. It is only possible to reinitialize the data via TNMS CT.
Operational status is disabled.
Fig. 15 Representation of the network and network element states
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Operating terminal
3.2 3.2.1
Basic operations Starting Element Manager Applications
The element manager applications are started via the TNMS – CT "Network View" window. A data connection is established to the relevant NE which allows the user to execute required functions directly at the NE. Element Manager Applications provide a set of functions for provisioning and reconfiguring a network element (NE). The different configuration data, such as cross connections, alarm filters (e.g. suppression of Alarms), performance thresholds and synchronization features will be inserted in tables or graphical views, depending from the NE, that shall be configured. To start Element Manager Application: 1. Right mouse click on the NE symbol. 2. From the opened context menu "Start Element Manager" menu (LMB) has to be selected. 3. Element Manager Application is started and NE "Chassis View" window is opened. The other way to start the Element Manager application, is just clicking twice over the NE symbol and wait until the "Chassis View" of the NE open.
28
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
3
1
2
Fig. 16 Starting the element manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Operating terminal
3.2.2
Background bitmap
Orientation within the Network View can be improved by using a background bitmap. For example, there is possible to attach a picture of a city map to be displayed in the background of the network plan and position your network elements in this map according to their real location. To add a new background bitmap for the Network View: 1. Right mouse click on the "Network View" window and from the opened context menu select "Background…" 2. In the "Background" window tick on the check box "None" and than press "Brows…" button. 3. In the "Browse for Background Map" window select the background bitmap to be used and than press "Open" button. 4. To apply modifications press (LMB) "OK" button.
3.2.3
Network element properties
To display properties of the Network Element: 1. Select (RMB) network element icon, properties to be displayed 2. From opened Pull Down menu select "Properties". 3. "Properties" window is displayed.
30
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
4
3 2
1
Fig. 17 Adding a background bitmap
1 3 2
Fig. 18 Network element properties
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
31
Operating terminal
3.2.4 3.2.4.1
Network topology management Links
To show connections between network elements the graphical links can be drawn. You can configure up to four lines for each link. To configure a line, complete the following steps: 4. Right mouse click on the symbol of the first NE, and from opened context menu select "Links…" 5. Drag and Drop the second NE from the "Network View" window. 6. Select the style and color of the link. To delete a link select "None" 7. To confirm settings press "Apply" button.
3.2.4.2
Port connections (not supported by hiT 7080)
A port connection represents a physical connection between two Ports of two different network elements. Creating a port connection object in TNMS – CT means only to create a presentation for this physical wire at TNMS – CT. The only precondition for the creation of a port connection at TNMS – CT is, that the network elements and the ports of the network elements at both ends of the port connection are supported by TNMS – CT. In order to create a port connection, complete the following steps: 1. Select (RMB) the source NE and from the opened context menu "Port Connections…". 2. "Port Connections" window is opened and all ports of this NE are now displayed there. 3. Select the destination NE and drag it into the right area. In case of an internal port connection, simply drop the same NE here. All ports of this NE are now displayed there. 4. Select one source and sink port on each side. If they are matching, the Connection buttons in the toolbar are activated. You can use a filter function to limit the displayed port connections. 5. Press one of the Connection buttons in the toolbar to create a port connection. One or more arrows between the previously selected ports indicate the created port connection. The created port connection will be highlighted.
32
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
1 2
4
3
Fig. 19 Creating a link
5 4
3
1 2
Fig. 20 Creating a port connection
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
33
Operating terminal
Port connection list The Port Connection List displays automatically updated information about all existing port connections. To get a "Port Connection List": 1. From the "Main Menu" of the "Main Window" select "View -> Port Connection List...". 2. "Port Connection List" is opened. 3. By right-clicking in the list, you can activate a context menu.
Delete port connection In order to delete a port connection, complete the following steps: 1. In the opened "Port Connections List" window select (RMB) port connection to be deleted. 2. From Pull Down menu select "Edit Port Connection...". "Port Connection" window is opened. 3. In the "Port Connection" window related port connection will be highlighted and between the ports arrows represent the connection. 4. Press the "Disconnect" button to delete the port connection. The deleted port connection also disappears from the Network View if it there are not any more port connections between the same NEs.
34
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
1
2
3
Fig. 21 Port connection list
4
1
2 3
Fig. 22 Delete port connection
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Operating terminal
3.2.5
Administrating NE Write Access
TNMS – CT only administers write access to managed network elements which support this feature via the context menu of the NE icon on the network map. Typically the TNMS – C is the Network Management station which has the "Write Access" to the NE. It has a higher priority than a TNMS – CT. That means TNMS – C has to release "Write Access" to a NE before it can be requested by TNMS – CT. TNMS – C also has the capability to enforce "Write Access" to a NE at any time. Consequently, the TNMS – CT operator also has quite limited control over external LCT write access. You can administer the NE write access via: Æ Network View Æ NE context menu Æ Access Control menu item Release Write Access Allow other LCTs to get write access on the selected NE Request Write Access Get write access on the selected NE unless any other LCT or TNMS – C has write access on it
3.2.6
Resynchronize Data
Sometimes SNMP controlled NEs (like hiT7080) cannot forward the complete data to the TNMS – CT. To be sure that you have the latest status updates and alarms available at the Graphical User Interface you can start a new NEC initialization for the selected network element via: Æ Network View Æ NE context menu Æ Resynchronize Data
36
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS-CT “A“
TNMS-CT “B“
Fig. 23 Administrating NE Write Access
Fig. 24 Resynchronize Data
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
37
Operating terminal
3.2.7
Requesting the alarm information
The alarms detected inside a manageable network will be reported by the NE's as alarm messages to the TNMS – CT. To view and process the current and historical alarms massages the "Alarm List" and "Alarm Log" files can be displayed. Alarm list A complete list of currently raised alarms or list of the alarms related to a selected object can be opened via the following menu entries: 1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Æ Alarm List...". or 2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Æ Alarm List...". 3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose (LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set your Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm list according to your requirements. Alarm Log A complete historical alarm list or historical alarm list related to a selected object can be opened via the following menu entries: 1. From the "Main Menu" select "Fault Æ Alarm Log...". or 2. From "Network View" from NE context menu select "Alarm Æ Alarm Log...". 3. By clicking (RMB) into an alarm entry you can open a popup menu. Choose (LMB) "Filter" entry to open the "Filter settings" window. Here you can set your Filter configuration to filter the entries in the alarm log according to your requirements.
38
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
1
2
3
Fig. 25 Requesting alarm list
1
2
3
Fig. 26 Requesting alarm log
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
39
Operating terminal
Alarm statistic window The Alarm Statistic window displays the alarm statistics for the selected network element. For each severity a counter for acknowledged alarms (Ack) and for unacknowledged alarms (Unack) is displayed. The right column shows a summary of both acknowledged and unacknowledged alarms for each alarm severity. The bottom line shows a summary of all acknowledged alarms, unacknowledged alarms and the total for both categories. The alarm severity is not taken into account here. The alarm statistics correspond to the Alarm List with a filter for the network element in question.
Fig. 27 Alarm statistic window
40
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
3.2.8
Terminating a TNMS – CT session
A TNMS – CT session is terminated when the user logs off. All windows are closed and access is only provided to the login function. The TNMS – CT Server process will not be stopped. 1. To terminate TNMS – CT user session press "Logoff" button. 2. To confirm the logoff, in the opened "Message" window press "OK" button.
1
2
Fig. 28 Terminating a TNMS CT session
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
41
Operating terminal
3.3
Connecting to the Network Element
There are two ways of connecting to the SURPASS hiT 70xx series network elements these are either TNMS – CT or CLI (Command Line Interface) TNMS – CT TNMS – CT provides the user with a purpose built graphical user interface in which operators can monitor and configure a selected network element. Each different type of Network Element has a specially built Element Manager application that must be installed with TNMS – CT. Additionally corresponding License Keys needs to be imported into the TNMS – CT SW to enable functionality. Connection is established by connecting the network interface on the TNMS – CT PC to the management interface on the network element directly or via a L2 switch using an Ethernet patch cable. The operator is required to configure IP setting on the TNMS – CT PC based on the settings within the network element before communication can be established. This is done within windows and not the TNMS – CT software. Alternatively TNMS – CT can connect to a NE also via a routed network. IP settings on the TNMS – CT PC must be done appropriate dependent on the local environment. Using an existing Data Communication Network DCN an operator can connect either to the local NE or to a remote NE. TIP DCN setup is also required as a prerequisite at the TNMS – CT. This is typically a task the network administrator takes care of. CLI (Command Line Interface) Unlike TNMS – CT the CLI access does not require any special software to be loaded onto an operator's machine. The operator can use Hyper Terminal which comes standard with Microsoft Windows or any similar program. The operator does not have to know any IP settings to establish a connection to a NE. Connection is established by connecting a straight serial cable between the Com Port on a PC and the Console Port on the network element. CLI will provide the operator with a menu operated system which will allows them to view and configure communications settings for the NE. The operator can communicate with the local network element or remotely communicate with a network element using a telnet program instead of Hyper Terminal.
42
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
CLI and TNMS-CT TNMS-CT Client
WAN / Internet WAN / Internet TNMS-CT Server
TNMS-CT
LAN
CLI TNMS-CT
RS232
RS232
CLI
hiT 7080
hiT 7080
STM-16 BSHR/2
STM-64 hiT 70xx
hiT 70xx
MSP 1+1
hiT 7080
MSP 1+1
hiT 7080
Fig. 29 CLI and TNMS-M LCT
Connectivity to NEs Element management functions are executed via the element managers (LCTs) provided by the TNMS-CT system
TNMS-CT
The The Console Console or or CLI CLI mode mode provides provides the the service service technician technician with with aa basic basic communications communications settings settings access access to to the the network network element element •• Support Support for for 11 NE NE at at aa time time •• No No special special software software required required to to connect. connect. •• Can Can remote remote telnet telnet to to neighboring neighboring NEs NEs when when no no routing routing protocol protocol established established
Network interface (Ethernet)
Metro-Access STM-1/4/16
CLI Serial line interface (RS232)
Fig. 30 Connectivity to NEs
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
43
Operating terminal
3.3.1
CLI / console access
To establish a connection to the network element using the CLI method: 1. Connect Cable between the Com Port (E.g. COM1) on PC and the Console Port on Network Element. The Console port can be found on the System Controller (SC) faceplate for SURPASS hiT 7080. 2. Start the Hyper Terminal (or similar) program. Hyper Terminal can be found by selecting Start Æ Programs Æ Accessories Communications Æ Hyper Terminal 3. Give the Hyper Terminal session a name to save configuring the settings next time it is used. TIP The same Terminal Settings are used for all the SURPASS hiT Products (7080, 7060 HC, 7060, 7030, 7035, 7025, 7020). 4. In the "Connect to" pop – up window select the serial communication port which you are going to use for your serial line communication (e.g. COM1) and hit the "OK" button. 5. Configure the selected serial port with the following settings. Bit Rate
9600
Data Bits
8
Parity
None
Stop Bits
1
Flow Control
None
TIP For this step, just press the "Restore Defaults" button. 6. Again hit the "OK" button.
44
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
2
3
Fig. 31 Creating a hyper terminal session
5
4
6
Fig. 32 Define serial port communication settings
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
45
Operating terminal
HyperTerminal: CLI Login 1. Press ENTER twice to refresh the login screen of the network element 2. Enter the User name and password The Default settings are User Name
Password
Access Level
root
Administrator
op
Operator
3. The Main Menu is displayed. A user can press any of the letters (displayed in brackets) to select that item.
46
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
7 6
Fig. 33 Hyper terminal: CLI Login
8
Fig. 34 Main menu display
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
47
Operating terminal
3.3.1.1
Configuring TNMS – CT IP settings
Prior to starting to communicate with a network element, the TNMS – CT IP Address must be configured. You must know the following information.
• An available IP address in the Management Port IP Subnet for TNMS – CT • Management Port Subnet Mask • Management Port IP Address This Information can be obtained by using the CLI connection. The information above assumes that the connection is going to be established via a L2 Switch, Hub or Ethernet Cross over cable but not a router. If connecting via a router the operator will have to consult with the Network Administrator to obtain the required address information. See Fig. 35 and Fig. 36 for examples.
48
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT: Local Connection Node IP Address: 172.16.8.61 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255
TNMS-CT Network: 10.10.6.0/28 Network: 10.10.6.0/28 L2 Switch
IP Address: 10.10.6.11 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 Default Gateway: 10.10.6.10
Management Port IP Address: 10.10.6.10 Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 Default Gateway: X.X.X.X
Fig. 35 TNMS – CT: Local Connection
TNMS – CT: Connection via Router IP: 10.10.5.161 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 10.10.5.254
IP: 10.10.6.1 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240
Node IP: 172.16.8.61 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.255
TNMS-CT Network: Network: 10.10.5.0/24 10.10.5.0/24
Network: 10.10.6.0/28 Network: 10.10.6.0/28 Router
IP: 10.10.5.254 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
L2 Switch
Management Port IP: 10.10.6.10 Management Port Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.240 Default Gateway: 10.10.6.1
Fig. 36 TNMS – CT: Connection via Router
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Operating terminal
TNMS – CT: IP Address configuration 1. Either Right Mouse Click on My Network Places and select Properties or Select Network connections from Start Æ Settings Æ Network Connections 2. Right Click on your network interface and select Properties 3. Select Internet Protocol (TCP / IP) and press Properties 4. Select Use the following IP address and fill in the IP settings as listed below IP Address: Must be in the same subnet as Management Port IP Address but not the same as any other IP address. Consider the Subnet Mask value!. Subnet Mask: Must be the same as Management Port Subnet Mask. Default Gateway: Must be the same as Management Port IP Address. 5. Click OK to apply these settings. Configuration complete. TIP To check connectivity between the LCT and the Network Element try pinging the Management Port IP Address and the Node IP Address.
50
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
1
2
Fig. 37 IP settings
3
4
5
Fig. 38 IP settings
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
51
Operating terminal
52
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
4
Exercises
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
53
Operating terminal
54
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operating terminal
Exercise Title: CLI and TNMS – CT Connection
Objectives: The participant is able to setup a connection to the NE using CLI and TNMS – CT
Pre-requisite: TNMS – CT and HyperTerminal installed.
Task Ask the instructor which is the element assigned to your team. Using the HyperTerminal establish a serial connection with the element assigned to your team and write down the data you find out
NE Type
NE IP Address
MGMT IP Address
MGMT Net Mask
Using the data from the table, configure the Ethernet card on your TNMS – CT PC and connect to the NE assigned using TNMS – CT LCT.
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Operating terminal
56
FT52424EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Operation: Traffic Setup
Contents 1 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4
hiT 7080 LCT GUI SDH cards and ports configuration Configuring a new card Delete a card NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration Cross – connections configuration Cross – connections principles Types of cross – connections Timeslot numbering Cross – connection management NE Resource Usage Statistics Exercise
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 7 8 10 14 21 22 24 26 28 62 65
1
Operation: Traffic Setup
2
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
hiT 7080 LCT GUI
RACK
Cross Connect Tools
Ethernet SN64 Level 2 OIS16D
LCT hiT 7080 2Mb
CL
7020 System
DOC Training Doc
I
Fan
Nokia Siemens Networks
Fig. 1
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Operation: Traffic Setup
Once the TNMS – CT Network Element management (hiT7080 LCT) program has successfully loaded the operator is presented with the Main operation window. This consists of:
• Title and Main Menu Bar. • Alarm Summary. • Chassis View. The Chassis View window gives a graphical representation of the subrack. It details card and slot information such as:
• Name of card. • Display any configurable ports that may be on the card. • List the Card operation state. • List the Port operation state. It is possible to configure and identify faults in the equipment by using various different menus. Main Menu The main menu lists general functions that are not related to one specific card or port. Some examples are Protection, Communications, Performance monitoring Context menus By right – clicking a certain component of the chassis, the specific context menu opens. There are three levels for context menus:
• Chassis Menu Via the chassis menu NE specific operations may be carried out. Examples are: Verify NE properties or Refresh Chassis
• Card Menus The Card menu lists items that are specific to the selected card. An example is creating cross connections from the Cross connection card
• Port Menus The Port menu lists items that are specific to the selected port. An Example is Port configuration which allows configuring laser shut down. TIP Items in the context menu change based on which component is selected in the chassis view.
4
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
LCT Main Menu Chassis Main Menu Context Menu
Physical port on card Card Operational State
Card description Alarm summary
Fig. 2 hiT7080 LCT GUI description
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Operation: Traffic Setup
6
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
2
SDH cards and ports configuration
Fig. 3 Second row for SDH/PDH cards
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
7
Operation: Traffic Setup
2.1
Configuring a new card
The SURPASS hiT 7080 Network Elements have a built in plug and play feature whereby the system controller automatically configures a new card when it is inserted into the sub-rack. There is no manual configuration of cards available. During the configuration of the new card, the card will be displayed into the slot and the card status "Initializing" is displayed at the bottom of the card in the LCT window. Once the configuration has been successfully completed, the card status is changed to "Active". Fig. 4 shows Slot 4 during the initialization phase. The alarms for all the ports of the newly configured card will not be supervised nor displayed until a signal is applied to the relevant port. The possible card statuses are:
• Initializing: the hardware / software of the card is being initialized (after being inserted into the chassis or while a cold reboot is taking place).
• Active: the card has been recognized by the system and it is working properly. • Operational: the same meaning as Active. This status shows only up on core
cards with redundancy option (switch matrix). In case of both of the cards are equipped, the one in the working status will also show an "Active" status while the protection one will show "Standby" (Temporary note: This state is not displayed in hiT 7080; just Active/STBY).
• Faulty: the card is not working. An internal failure has been detected. • Mismatch: this label will be appear in case of equipping a card not supported on the chassis (the card type is not the expected one; e.g. after card replacement another card type is inserted into slot without having deleted the old one administratively).
• Absent: the card has been removed from shelf or there is a cold reboot ongoing.
8
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Fig. 4 Card initialization
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Operation: Traffic Setup
2.2
Delete a card
Prior to deleting a card from the sub – rack the following preconditions must be fulfilled.
• Removal of all traffic cross-connections related with the card. • Removal of card / ports from protection schemes. • Removal of related ports from synchronization sources list. • Physical removal of the card from sub – rack. The following slides demonstrate the removal of an SDH card from Slot 4. 1. Fig. 5 shows the card operating normally "Active" in the sub – rack. The operator should check that all preconditions have been fulfilled prior to perform the physical removal of the card. 2. Card should be physically removed from the sub – rack. The LCT will display "Absent" in red color at the bottom of the card once it has been physically removed.
10
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
Fig. 5 Normal card state operation
2
Fig. 6 Card physically removed from sub-rack
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Operation: Traffic Setup
3. Right mouse click on the card showing the "Absent" status and select the "Delete Card" option on the pop-up menu. Note that the "Delete Card" option is only available in the pop up menu when the card has been physically removed from the sub – rack. 4. Click the "OK" button to confirm the deletion of the card. 5. A "Card has been deleted successfully" message will be displayed once the system has done it. Once more click the "OK" button to confirm.
12
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
4
3
5
Fig. 7 Deleting a Card
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Operation: Traffic Setup
2.3
NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration
To configure or view the NE / card / port properties carry out the following steps: 1. Open the Chassis context menu and select "NE Property Configuration". 2. The "NE Property Configuration" window will open. Most of the configurable parameters displayed in this window are set at time of commissioning and should not be changed without good reason. 3. Double – click in one of the desire card displayed in the Card List. 4. The corresponding "Card Property Configuration" window will open. TIP The content of the "Card Property Configuration" window will vary depending on the selected card type 5. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like "Card Label" or "Card Description" which contain descriptive text about the card. 6. Click either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the "Card Property Configuration" window open. The "OK" button will close the "Card Property Configuration" window. 7. In the lower half of the window the "Port List" is displayed. From here there is possible to get an overview about the most important port parameters.
14
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
2
1
3
Fig. 8 Open NE / Card Properties window
4
5 3
3
6 3
7
Fig. 9 Open NE / Card Properties window
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Operation: Traffic Setup
8. To view or configure port parameters double – click the respective entry in the Port List. 9. The corresponding "Port Property Configuration" window will open. TIP The content of the "Port Property Configuration" window will vary depending on the selected port type. 10. It is possible to configure some of the parameters in this window, like :
• Port Label: contains descriptive text about the port • Port Mode: can be set to Auto Mode: if the LOS defect clears or does not exist, the port mode is automatically changed to Monitor; if the LOS defect keeps existing, the mode also stays as Auto mode and the port mode performs the same function as the Non – Monitor mode. Monitor: port supervision is enabled. Non-monitor: port supervision is disabled.
• Port Admin Mode: can be set to Enabled: administratively enabled (Up); on optical port needs to be enabled to restart the Laser. Disabled: administratively disabled (Down); at optical port also the Laser will be shut down.
• Auto Laser Shutdown: can be set to Yes: administratively enable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port. No: administratively disable Automatic Laser Shutdown mechanism for this port.
• Port ALS Mode: can be set to No Command: if ALS is administratively enabled Automatic Laser Restart mechanism will take place for this port. Manual Restart: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Restart pulse with a duration of 2 seconds will be sent Manual Test: if ALS is administratively enabled a Laser Test pulse with a duration of 90 +/- 10 seconds will be sent
• Working Mode: only available for 8 x STM-4/-1 and can be set to STM-4: this port operates at 622 Mbps STM-1: this port operates at 155 Mbps 11. Click the "Apply" button to activate all the changes.
16
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
9
10
8
11 10
Fig. 10 Port Properties Configuration window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
Operation: Traffic Setup
12. In the lower half of the window the "Port status" is displayed. From here you can obtain information about the current port status and most important monitoring parameters of optical SFP/XFP modules. 13. Additional SFP/XFP specific information can be displayed. Click the "Advanced button". An information window will pop up. 14. Click the "OK" button to confirm. 15. The "Advanced Port Status Information" window will pop up. TIP The content of the Advanced Port Status Information window will vary depending on the selected SFP/XFP type.
18
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
14
15
13
12
Fig. 11 Advanced Port Status Information window
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Operation: Traffic Setup
20
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
3
Cross – connections configuration SN64
Fig. 12 Cross-connections
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.1
Cross – connections principles
In order to connect internally signals on different interface modules cross – connections have to be configured. These connections are initiated by software command and allow easy configuration, reconfiguration or deletion. The number and possible types of cross – connections depends on the switching capacity of the NE. Generally, cross – connections can be created between:
• Line interface and line interface. • Line interface and tributary interface. • Tributary interface and tributary interface.
22
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Cross-connection overview
SWITCHING MATRIX(S) Line to line connection
Line
Trib
Trib
Trib
Line
Trib
Line to tributary connection Tributary to tributary connection
Fig. 13 Cross – connection principles
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.2
Types of cross – connections
The cross – connections are established with the aid of "Termination Points" TP. As an example, a TP could be a VC-4 on an ETH interface (TTP) or a VC-4 on a SDH interface (CTP). Each termination point characterizes the source TP A or the sink TP Z of the connection. There are four different types of cross – connections that can be set up:
• Unidirectional cross – connection: In a unidirectional cross – connection, unidirectional termination points are linked together. Traffic flows from TP A (source) to TP Z (sink). The other direction remains unused
• Bi – directional cross – connection: In a bi – directional cross – connection, bi – directional termination points are linked together. Traffic flows from TP A to TP Z and vice versa.
• Loop back cross – connection: In a loop back cross – connection, the source and the sink of the termination point are linked in a loop. (TP A and TP Z are the same termination point)
• Broadcast cross – connection: A broadcast cross – connection is a special arrangement of a number of unidirectional cross – connections that have the same "source" termination point. In that sense, there are several different TP Z linked with the same TP A. Broadcast cross – connections are only possible without protection.
24
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Cross-connection types Bidirectional cross connection
SWITCHING MATRIX(S)
Line
Trib
Trib
Trib
Line
Trib
Unidirectional cross connection Broadcast cross connection
Loopback cross connection
Fig. 14 Cross – connection types
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.3
Timeslot numbering
Over time three different numbering systems have been developed and used to refer to different virtual containers within a STM signal. The 3 most popular ones are Time Slot Numbering, Tributary Numbering and KLM numbering. Timeslot Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the physical order in which the VC-12 are multiplexed within a VC-4. Tributary Numbering is a number between 1 and 63 representing the "logical" order (according to G.707 mapping) the VC-12 containers are mapped into a VC-4, it's a graphical order instead a physical one. K,L,M numbering gives the VC-12 location, related to a TU-3, TU-2, TU-12 within a VC-4. Different equipment use different numbering systems to number the VC-12 containers within a VC-4. Tributary Numbering is used in a SMA Release 1, SMA Release 2, SMA1-K, TNMS. K,L,M Numbering is used in SMA Series 4, SURPASS hiT 7070, 7050. The SURPASS hiT 7080 can use either the Tributary Numbering or the K,L,M numbering. WARNING When interworking between different SDH equipment, it should be made clear which numbering system is being used, to ensure signals are connected correctly.
26
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 1
V
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
VC4 Column Number
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Time Slot
1 22 43 4 25 46 7 28 49 10 31 52 13 34 55 16 37 58 19 40 61
Tributary
C
4 P O
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
H
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
L
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
M
K
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
VC4 Column Number
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
Time Slot
2 23 44 5 26 47 8 29 50 11 32 53 14 35 56 17 38 59 20 41 62
Tributary K
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
L
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
M
50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70
VC4 Column Number
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63
Time Slot
3 24 45 6 27 48 9 30 51 12 33 54 15 36 57 18 39 60 21 42 63
Tributary K
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
L
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
M
Fig. 15 TU-12's physical position in a VC-4
TUG3 #1 TUG2 #1
TUG2 #2
TUG2 #3
TUG2 #4
TUG2 #5
TUG2 #6
TUG2#7
TUG3 #2
TUG3#3
1
22
43
2
23
44
3
24
45
1 (1,1,1)
2 (1,1,2)
3 (1,1,3)
22 (2,1,1)
23 (2,1,2)
24 (2,1,3)
43 (3,1,1)
44 (3,1,2)
45 (3,1,3)
4
25
46
5
26
47
6
27
48
4 (1,2,1)
5 (1,2,2)
6 (1,2,3)
25 (2,2,1)
26 (2,2,2)
27 (2,2,3)
46 (3,2,1)
47 (3,2,2)
48 (3,2,3)
7
28
49
8
29
50
9
30
51
7 (1,3,1)
8 (1,3,2)
9 (1,3,3)
28 (2,3,1)
29 (2,3,2)
30 (2,3,3)
49 (3,3,1)
50 (3,3,2)
51 (3,3,3)
10
31
52
11
32
53
12
33
54
10 (1,4,1)
11 (1,4,2)
12 (1,4,3)
31 (2,4,1)
32 (2,4,2)
33 (2,4,3)
52 (3,4,1)
53 (3,4,2)
54 (3,4,3)
13
34
55
14
35
56
15
36
57
13 (1,5,1)
14 (1,5,2)
15 (1,5,3)
34 (2,5,1)
35 (2,5,2)
36 (2,5,3)
55 (3,5,1)
56 (3,5,2)
57 (3,5,3)
16
37
58
17
38
59
18
39
60
16 (1,6,1)
17 (1,6,2)
18 (1,6,3)
37 (2,6,1)
38 (2,6,2)
39 (2,6,3)
58 (3,6,1)
59 (3,6,2)
60 (3,6,3)
19
40
61
20
41
62
21
42
63
19 (1,7,1)
20 (1,7,2)
21 (1,7,3)
40 (2,7,1)
41 (2,7,2)
42 (2,7,3)
61 (3,7,1)
62 (3,7,2)
63 (3,7,3)
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12 #3
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12 #3
TU12 #1
TU12 #2
TU12#3
Code
Timeslot Number Tributary Number K, L, M Number
Example
53 33 (2,4,3)
Fig. 16 Timeslot, tributary and KLM numbering
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
27
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4
Cross – connection management
The procedure for configuring cross – connections is identical for all switching levels. Different level termination points are used, depending on the configuration of the selected card.
3.4.1
Listing existing cross – connection's (CC)
A list of all existing cross – connections or a filtered list of them can be seen by: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ Cross – Connect Management. A blank "Cross – connect Management" screen will appear. This screen is split into 2 areas, the top area (Conditional Settings) is a cross – connection filter, which allows to display just a specific cross – connections according with the selection. 2. Cross – connections can be filtered based on Card, Port, Cross – connection level (Capacity), Direction, Circuit label or in which LOCC the cross – connections are stored. To filter the information set the desired filter. 3. Press the "Query" button at the bottom of the window to display the results of the current filter. If the conditional settings remain untouched all cross – connections will be displayed All cross – connections in the SURPASS hiT 7080 have two (or more in case of broadcast CC) termination points labeled A and Z. In the case of bi – directional cross – connections the order in which they appear does not matter (traffic flows in both directions). In case of unidirectional and broadcast cross – connection, care has to be taken in order to select as A point the signal source and as Z point the signal destination (since in this case, traffic only flows from A to Z). TIP To view all cross – connections in the NE, do not change any field into the "Condition Settings" area and just click in "Query" button.
28
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
3 2
Fig. 17 Cross – connections list: modify filter settings
Fig. 18 Cross – connections list: filtered list
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
29
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.2
Preparing the multiplex structure
SURPASS hiT 7080 has a high – order switch matrix which supports VC-4-64c, VC4-16c, VC-4-4c and VC-4 connections (note that virtual concatenated cross connections are built as multiple connections) and has a low – order switch matrix which supports VC-3 and VC-12 connections. Even when all this CC levels are supported, the default structure on all SDH interfaces is prepared to carry only unstructured VC-4's. If a non default payload structure is required within a STM-N signal, then the payload structure has to be first configured manually on the interface. If this is not done, the required CC can not be created. All modifications are made by selecting the menu option Configuration Æ TP multiplex structure.
3.4.2.1
Converting payload structure to AU-4-4c
This option is only available on STM-4, STM-16 and STM-64 cards. 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ TP Multiplexing Structure. The same option can be achieved, clicking with the right mouse button over the desire port and select the option TP Multiplexing Structure. 2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired SDH card and port can be selected. 3. Press the "Query" button to continue. 4. The "TP Multiplex Structure" popup window will expand to show the current structure for the selected port. By right clicking on an item and selecting "Expand All", the complete structure will be expanded. By pressing the "Plus" sign, only the item next to the sign will be expanded. TIP If any container inside of the port (AU-4's, TU-3's or TU-12's) is used for a cross – connection or protection, the icon related to the container on the left side will have the orange color and will use a pyramid as a icon, means is used. Balloon blue color means, that the container are available for cross – connections and can be used to change the structure of the AU-4s. Finally the square icon and green color means that the container is being used for MS-SPRing protection. 5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into an AU4-4c with the left mouse button. 6. Right click to display the menu. On the menu select "Mapping AUG-4 Æ AUG-4 To AU-4-4c".
30
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1 2
3
Fig. 19 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows
4
5
6
Fig. 20 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c I
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
31
Operation: Traffic Setup
WARNING The Right Click menu will change based on the item currently highlighted. 7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information box will indicate the process is being applied. 8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
32
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Structure not applied yet
8 7 3
Fig. 21 Converting Structure to AU-4-4c II
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.2.2
Converting payload structure to AU-4 Clear Channel
This procedure has to be performed in order to convert a contiguously concatenated VC-4-nc into a VC-4 structure. No cross connections should be present using the VC4-nc to be reconfigured. The following procedure shows how to un-structure a VC-44c: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ TP Multiplexing Structure. 2. This will bring up a popup box where the desired card and port can be selected. 3. Press the "Query" button to continue. 4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next to the plus sign.
34
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1 2
3
Fig. 22 Opening TP Multiplexing Structure windows
4
5 6
Fig. 23 Converting Structure to AUG-1 I
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Operation: Traffic Setup
5. Select the required AUG-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified into AUG-1 structure. 6. Right click to display the menu. Select "Mapping AUG-4 Æ AUG-4 To AUG-1". 7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time. 8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
36
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Structure not applied yet
8 7
Fig. 24 Converting Structure to AUG-1 II
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.2.3
Converting payload structure to TU-12
The default payload structure for STM signals in the 7080 is not prepared for VC-12 connections. Before creating a VC-12 cross – connection using that payload, the TU12 structure has to be prepared. The procedures to structure the VC-4 into VC-12's are: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ TP Multiplexing Structure. 2. This will bring up a popup box where should be select the desire card and port. 3. Press the "Query" button to continue. 4. The TP Multiplex Structure popup box will expand to show the current structure of the selected port. Right click on an item and select "Expand All" and it will expand the complete structure. Press the plus sign to expand only the item next to the plus sign.
38
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1 2
3
Fig. 25 Payload structure to TU-12 I
4
5 6
Fig. 26 Payload structure to TU-12 II
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
39
Operation: Traffic Setup
5. Select the required AU-4 (Administrative Unit Group) to be modified with the left mouse button. 6. Right mouse click to display the drop down menu. Select Mapping AU-4 Æ AU-4 To TUG-3. Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item. WARNING The Right Click menu will change based on what item is currently highlighted (background color in blue) and not the item that may have been right clicked.
TIP TUG-3 is a Tributary Unit Group Level 3. This means, it is a group of 7 TUG-2, each of them consists of 3 TU-2 containers. It is not a TU-3 container for a 34/45Mb PDH Signal 7. Press the "Apply" button to modify the structure. An information window will pop up to indicate the process is being applied. This takes some time. 8. Once the structure has been modified successfully a dialog box will show up. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
40
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Structure not applied yet 8 7
Fig. 27 Payload structure to TU-12 II
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.2.4
Converting payload structure to TU-3
A TU-3 Structure can be mapped from a previously created TUG-3 container consisting of TU-12 signals. 1. Select Configuration Æ TP Multiplexing Structure. 2. This will bring up a popup box where the required SDH Card and Port to be configured can be selected. 3. Press Query to Continue. 4. Select the TUG-3 to be modified with the left mouse button. 5. Right mouse click to display the menu. Select Mapping TUG-3 Æ TUG-3 To TU-3. Note the Structure will change to reflect the selected item.
42
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1 2
3
Fig. 28 Payload structure to TU-3 I
4
5
Structure not applied yet
6
Fig. 29 Payload structure to TU-3 II
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
43
Operation: Traffic Setup
6. Press the Apply button to apply modification. After pressing Apply an information box will indicate the process is being applied. 7. A dialog box will be displayed when successfully completed. TIP This structure is created by each TUG-3 and will no be reflected in to the other two TUG-3. If the intention is create three TU-3 inside of one AU-4, these steps must be done into the other two TUG-3.
44
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
7
Fig. 30 Payload structure to TU-3 III
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.3
Creating a bi – directional VC-12 cross – connection
A bi – directional VC-12 cross – connection is the most common cross – connection in use. In order to create such a connection: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ Cross-Connect Management. A blank Cross – connect Management screen will appear. 2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create Cross-Connect" window. 3. Select "Direction" as "Bidirectional" (default selection). 4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross – connection (optional). This may help to identify the cross-connection at later point in time. 5. Select "Capacity" as "VC-12" (default selection). 6. Select the "A" Card and the "Z" Card.
46
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
Fig. 31 Cross – Connection Management window
3
4
7 6
5
Fig. 32 Create a cross – connection I
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
47
Operation: Traffic Setup
7. Select a Port for TP "A" and then a port for TP "Z". 8. Select the two TU-12 containers to be connected. The selected TU-12s are shown with a blue background color. TIP If the desired TU-12 container is not listed, check if the TP has been used for another cross – connection or SNCP protection. First check if the payload structure is the correct one. All this can be done by analyzing the "TP Multiplexing Structure". 9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. The "Apply" button will keep the "Create Cross – connection" window open after the cross – connection has been created. The "OK" button will close the "Create Cross – connection" window. An information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross – connection. 10. After the cross – connection has been successfully created, a dialog box will show up informing about the result. Press the "OK" button to confirm. TIP The above procedure can be followed for creating cross – connections at any level. Instead of selecting the "Capacity" parameter as "VC-12" select the desired level as "VC-3", "VC-4", "VC4-4c", "VC4-16c" or "VC4-64c".
48
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
7
Fig. 33 Create a cross – connection II
8 7
10
9
Fig. 34 Crete a cross – connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.4
Creating multiple cross – connections
Multiple cross – connections can be created at the same time between the same cards. This may be useful when creating Virtually Concatenated Ethernet services or multiple TU-12/VC-12 services. Follow the directions given above but instead of selecting one termination point (step 8) hold down either the CTRL or SHIFT key and select multiple termination points. CTRL will allow the selection of non sequential points whereas SHIFT allows the selection of sequential points. WARNING Note: When the equipment creates the cross – connection it will connect the top two selected points and then the next two selected points and so on up to the end. It will not connect the points in the order they were selected.
50
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Multiple selection using “Ctrl” button
Multiple selection using “Shift” button
Fig. 35 Creating a multiple cross – connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.5
Creating a broadcast (point – to – multipoint) cross – connection
A Broadcast cross – connection consists of a series of unidirectional cross – connections where the root point (TP A) is the same but the leaf endpoints (TP Z) are different. TIP The maximum number of leaf endpoints for a single P2MP connection at the HOCC switching matrix is 16. Each cross – connection must be created separately. 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ Cross – Connect Management. A blank "Cross – connect Management" screen will appear. 2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create Cross – connect" window. 3. Select Direction as "Unidirectional". 4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross – connection. This may help identify the cross – connection at a later point in time. 5. Select the correct "Capacity" for the cross – connection. 6. Select the desired "A" Card and "Z" Card. TIP In this case the direction has to be taken in account. The signal source point should be selected in the "A" column. The signal destination point should be selected in the "B" column. 7. Select the "A" Port (or List All) and the "Z" Port 8. Select the two containers desired to be connected. 9. Press the "Apply" button to create the cross – connection. An information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross – connection. 10. Once the cross – connection has been successfully created, a dialog box informs about the results. Press "OK" to finish (the first unidirectional connection is created).
52
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
Fig. 36 Creating a Broadcast cross-connection I
3
4 5
6
7 8 7
10
7
Fig. 37 Creating a Broadcast cross – connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
53
Operation: Traffic Setup
In order to create the other leaves for the broadcast cross – connection: 11. Keep the "A" point the same and modify the "Z" Card, Port and Termination Point. 12. Select the two containers and press "Apply". An information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the next cross – connection. 13. Press the "OK" button in the dialog box that shows up. Repeat step 11, 12 and 13 until all leave endpoints have been added to the Broadcast cross-connection. TIP All cross – connections that are part of a broadcast cross – connection will be listed as a P2MP (Point to Multi Point) type of connection.
54
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
11
13
12
Fig. 38 Adding a second leg to the broadcast cross – connection
Fig. 39 Listing cross – connections: P2MP cross – connections details
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.6
Creating a loopback cross – connection
A loopback cross – connection is a special type of unidirectional cross – connection where the source and the destination points are the same. To create a loopback cross – connection: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ Cross-Connect Management. A blank "Cross-connect Management" screen will appear. 2. Press the "Create" button at the bottom of the window to open the "Create Cross-connect" window. 3. Select "Direction" as "Unidirectional". 4. Assign a "Circuit Label" to the cross - connection. This may help identify the cross – connection at a later point in time. 5. Select the "Capacity" for the cross – connection. 6. Select the same card for "A" Card and "Z" Card 7. Select the same port for "A" Port and "Z" Port 8. Select the same container in both columns (A and Z). 9. Press either the "Apply" or "OK" button. After this an information box will be displayed during the time taken by the network element to create the cross – connection. 10. Press "OK" in the dialog box that shows up to finish.
56
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
Fig. 40 Creating a Loopback cross-connection
3
4 5 6
7 6 8 6
10
9 6
Fig. 41 Creating a Loopback cross – connection
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
57
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.7
Modifying the Cross – connection
The existing cross – connections list into the 7080, there is possible to have access to the details of the cross – connections and make few modifications. To have access to the details of the cross – connection, go to the Cross-Connection Management window, select the desire cross – connections. The background entry will turn to blue color and click the option View. New window will pop-up with the details of the cross – connection. All the fields are in a grey color means no possibility to change anything. There is another way to have access to the same window, just click twice over the desire cross – connection. In order to modify the cross – connection, select the desire cross – connection and click in the option Modify. The Modify Cross-Connection window will pop – up. The available fields are Type (this topic will be discusses later) and Circuit Label.
58
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Fig. 42 Cross – connection details
Fig. 43 Cross – connection modifications
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
59
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.4.8
Deleting a cross – connection
If a cross – connection is no longer required it can be deleted in order to make the bandwidth available for future connections. For deleting a cross connection: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ Cross-Connect Management. A blank Cross-connect Management screen will appear. 2. Set the filter as required at the top of the window to limit the list of cross – connections. 3. Press the "Query" button to display the filtered list of cross – connections. 4. Select the cross – connection to be deleted (the background color changes to blue) 5. Press the "Delete" button. 6. A dialog box will be displayed warning about the consequences of the deletion and asking for confirmation. Make sure the connection to be deleted is the right one and press "Yes". A waiting dialog will be displayed during the time it takes for the network element to delete the cross – connection. 7. An information dialog box will be displayed once the cross – connection has been successfully deleted. Press the "OK" button to finish.
60
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
3
Fig. 44 Deleting a cross – connection I
5
6
4
Fig. 45 Deleting a cross – connection II
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
61
Operation: Traffic Setup
3.5
NE Resource Usage Statistics
To get an overview about used and unused resources (TPs) in the NE: 1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ NE Æ Resource Usage Statistics 2. In the top section of the "Resource Usage Statistics" window a list with the following information is displayed:
• Card: Displays all the cards in use. • Port: Displays all the ports of the corresponding cards. • Usage Percentage: Displays the usage of this port in percentage. 3. Select one port 4. The details of selected port will be listed in the CTP Usage Detail list.
• CTP Mapping: Displays the TP mapping. • Used or Not: Displays the CTP's state.
62
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
1
2
3
4
Fig. 46 NE Resource Usage Statistics
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Operation: Traffic Setup
64
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
4
Exercise
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
65
Operation: Traffic Setup
66
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Exercise 1 Title: NE / Card / Port Properties Configuration Objectives: The participant shall be able to recognize the different cards populated in the NE chassis Pre-requisite: Pre-read chapter Task Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 47 Start up information
• Start Network Element Management for your NE. Check if you have "Write Access".
• Open the "NE Properties Configuration" window. • Open the "Card Properties Configuration" window for the STM-4/1 in Slot 17 • Open the "Port Properties Configuration" window for Port #5. • Open the "Advanced Port Status Information" window.
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
67
Operation: Traffic Setup
Query • Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "NE Properties Configuration" window.
NE Type: NE Name: Slot Number
68
Card Type
Nr. of Ports Available
Slot Number
1
18
2
19
3
20
4
21
5
22
6
23
7
24
8
25
9
26
10
27
11
28
12
29
13
30
14
31
15
32
16
33
17
FAN
Card Type
Nr. of Ports Available
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
• Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Card Properties Configuration" window form the card inserted on Slot #17.
NE Type: NE Name Slot # Card Type Port Number
Port Type
Port Mode
Admin Status
Port Status
P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07 P08
• Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Port Properties Configuration" window.
NE Card Port # Port Type Port Label Port Mode Port Admin Mode Auto Laser Shutdown Port ALS Mode Working Mode Operating Status
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
69
Operation: Traffic Setup
• Complete the following table with the data obtained from the "Advanced Port Status Information" window.
Card Name Port Name Operation Status Laser Bias Current Received Laser Power Transmitted Laser Power Transceiver Temperature Nominal Bit Rate Laser Wavelength Link Length SFP Vendor Name NSN Part number Vendor's Manufacturing Date
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 48 End of exercise 1
70
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Exercise 2 Title: Cross – Connection Management
Objectives: The participant is be able to list, create, modify and delete cross – connections
Pre-requisite: Pre – read the information given in this chapter.
Task 1 Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 49 Cross – connection start up information
• In this part of the exercise each team has to create a 2 Mbps bi-directional crossconnection.
• In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team, just have a look about the cross-connection data for the connection to be created.
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
71
Operation: Traffic Setup
VC-12 Bidirectional Cross – Connections: MUX Plan 2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
DDF
STM 4 STM 4 STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 16#5 #5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C C 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) Slot 7080 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #1
Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2 STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1 STM 4
C C 1
Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
STM 4
LC 1 #1
Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
STM 16 2 Mbps Electrical
LC1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) 1 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 10.10.6.40 16C#8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4 STM 4
DDF
Fig. 50 MUX Plan
According with the assigned team, please create the following cross-connections:
72
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Team
Type
Capacity
Label
TPA
TPZ Slot 3. Port # 1
Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
LC1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
1
Slot 3. Port # 1 Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
AU-4 # 2
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
2 Bidirectional
Bidirectional
VC-12
VC-12
CC2
CC1
3 Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port #1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port #1 Bidirectional
VC-12
CC1
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
4
Slot 2. Port # 1 Bidirectional
VC-12
CC2
LC 1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2 TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query • After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.
• Delete all cross-connections, which have been created. Check the result of deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
73
Operation: Traffic Setup
Task 2 • In this part of the exercise each team need to create a VC-12 broadcast cross – connection.
• In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and look down to find in the table, the relevant cross-connection data for the connection to be created.
VC-12 Broadcast Cross – Connections: MUX Plan DDF
2 Mbps Electrical
STM 4 STM 4 STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 16#5 #5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C C 7080 Slot 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5
Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2 STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1 STM 4
C C 1
Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
STM 4
LC 1 #1
Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
STM 16 2 Mbps Electrical
LC 1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 C 10.10.6.40 16 #8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 25 #1 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
STM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
Fig. 51 MUX Plan
According with your team, please create the relative cross – connections required
74
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Team
Type
Capacity
Name
TPA
TPZ Slot 16. Port # 1.AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
1
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
LC1.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 16. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
2
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
Slot 25.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 #1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 2. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot2. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
3
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
Slot 25.
Slot16. Port # 1. AU-4 #1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 17. Port # 3. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 3. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
4
Unidirectional
VC-12
BR
LC1.
Slot 17. Port # 1. AU-4 # 1
Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 17. Port # 2. AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query • After creation of all cross-connections contact your instructor. He will prove the functionality of the created path using a PDH/SDH test set.
• Delete all cross – connections, which have been created. Check the result of deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
75
Operation: Traffic Setup
Task 3 • In this part of the exercise each team has to create a loopback cross – connection. • In the MUX plan shown below find the NE assigned to your team and find out the relevant cross – connection data for the connection to be created.
VC-12 Loopback Cross – Connections: MUX Plan DDF
2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
STM 4 STM 4 STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 16#5 #5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C C 7080 Slot 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5
Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1 STM 16
C C 1
Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
STM 4
Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
STM 4
LC 1 #1
STM 16 2 Mbps Electrical
LC 1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 7080 Wuppertal Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 Landau (LD) 1 7080 Landau (LD) Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 C 10.10.6.40 16 #8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4 STM 4
DDF
Fig. 52 MUX Plan
According with your team, find in the table the required cross – connection:
76
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Operation: Traffic Setup
Team
Type
Capacity
Name
TPA
TPZ
1
Unidirectional
VC-12
LB
LC 1. Port # 1
LC 1. Port # 1
4
Unidirectional
VC-12
LB
LC 1. Port # 1
LC 1. Port # 1
Query • Delete all cross – connections, which have been created. Check the result of deleting with the "Cross-Connect Management" window.
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 53 End of exercise 2
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
77
Operation: Traffic Setup
78
FT52425EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Protection Features
Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 3 3.1 3.2 4 4.1 4.2 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6
Protection features general Protection architectures Switching types Protection mode Traffic Protections MSP Line protection Path protection Multiplex Section – Self Protecting Ring (MS-SPRing) Equipment protection 1:N card protection 1+1 card protection Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080 Traffic Protection Card protection Protection configuration MSP 1+1 MSP 1:N Path protection E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection HOCC card protection LOCC Card protection System Controller Card Protection Exercise
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 4 8 12 15 16 16 18 25 26 26 29 30 30 33 34 44 56 70 78 80 82 85
1
Protection Features
2
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
Protection features general
Drop & Continue Path Protection VC Trail Protection SNCP
Traffic Protection
Card Protection
SDH Network Line Protection
Self Healing Ring Protection
Multiplex Section Protection
Single Ended MSP
Double Ended MSP
MS-SPRING/2
Fig. 1 Protection features
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Protection Features
1.1
Protection architectures
1+1 protection architecture In the 1+1 architecture type, a protection transport entity (e.g. a multiplex section) is dedicated as a backup facility for the working transport entity with the normal traffic signal bridged onto the protection transport entity at the source end – point of the protected domain. The normal traffic on working and protection transport entities is transmitted simultaneously to the sink end-point of the protected domain, where a selection between the working and protection transport entity is made based on some predetermined criteria, such as signal fail and signal degrade indications.
4
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1+1 protection protection in in fault-free fault-free case
working Normal
Norma l
protection
Selector
Selector
Permanent Bridge
Pe rmanent Bridge
Fig. 2 1+1 protection in fault-free case
1+1 1+1 protection protection in case case of of fault fault
SWITCH SWITCH
working
Normal
Norma l
protection
Selector Permanent Bridge
Selector Pe rmanent Bridge
Fig. 3 1+1 protection in faulty case
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Protection Features
1:N protection architecture In the 1: N architecture type, 1 dedicated protection transport entity is a shared backup facility for N working transport entities. The bandwidth of the protection transport entity should be allocated in such a way that it may be possible to protect any of the n working transport entities in case the protection transport entity is available. When a working transport entity is determined to be impaired, its normal traffic signal must be transferred from the working to the protection transport entity at both the source and sink end-points of the protected domain. It is noted that when more than 1 working transport entities is impaired, only 1 normal traffic signal can be protected. The bridge can be realized in two manners:
• broadcast bridge • selector bridge With "broadcast bridge" connectivity (Fig. 4) the normal traffic signal is permanent connected to the working transport entity and occasionally to the protection transport entity (Fig. 5) also. With "selector bridge" connectivity the normal traffic signal is connected either to the working transport entity, or the protection transport entity. Interworking between the two options is guaranteed.
6
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1:n protection without extra traffic in fault-free case
Null signal (0)
Null signal (0)
Normal (1)
Working (1)
Normal (1)
Normal (2)
Working (2)
Normal (2)
Normal (n)
Working (n)
Normal (n)
Extra (n+1)
Protection (0)
AIS
Extra (n+1)
AIS
Selector
Selector Bridge
Bridge
Fig. 4 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault free case)
1:n protection without extra traffic in case of fault SWITCH
SWITCH
Null signal (0)
Null signal (0)
Normal (1)
Normal (1)
Working (1)
SWITCH
Working (2)
Normal (2)
Normal (n)
Working (n)
Normal (n)
Extra (n+1)
Protection (0)
Normal (2)
SWITCH
AIS
Extra (n+1)
AIS
Selector
Selector Bridge
Bridge
Fig. 5 1:n protection architecture with broadcast bridge and without extra traffic (fault case)
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
7
Protection Features
1.2
Switching types
Unidirectional switching If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In case of single ended switching, only the affected transmission direction is switched. In the opposite direction, the signal remains on the worker line. This protection – switching scheme is also known as "Single ended protection switching".
8
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Unidirectional switching: Worker line used worker
protection
Fig. 6 Principle of unidirectional switching: Worker line used
Unidirectional switching: Protection line used
worker SWITCH
protection
Fig. 7 Principle of unidirectional switching: Protection line used
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Protection Features
Bi – directional switching If a fault occurs on the worker line, the signal is switched to the protection line. In case of bi – directional switching, both transmission directions are switched to the protection line. This protection – switching scheme is also known as "double – ended protection switching".
10
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Bi-directional switching: Worker line used
worker
protection
Fig. 8 Principle of bi – directional switching: Worker line used
Bi-directional switching: Protection line used
worker SWITCH
SWITCH
protection
Fig. 9 Principle of bi – directional switching: Protection line used
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Protection Features
1.3
Protection mode
Non – revertive protection switching If a fault occurs on the working line, the traffic is switched to the protection line. In non – revertive protection mode, the data signal will remain on the protection line after the fault has been cleared. The switch back to the original line will only occur if a new fault occurs on the protection line, or by operator command.
Revertive protection switching In case of a failure, the data signal will be switched to the protection line. Once the fault has been cleared, and the line is working in a fault – free state, the traffic will be switched back to the worker line. Before this switching-back occurs, the worker line must remain fault – free for at least some minutes. This period is called "Wait Time to Restore" and can be configured individually.
12
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Non-revertive protection mode fault clearance clearance
WORKER Path
error free worker
° switch over
ª PROTECTION Path
Fig. 10 Principle of non – revertive operation
Revertive protection mode Wait-To-Restore Periode 0 ... 30 min
°
fault clearance
switch over
PROTECTION Path
WTR switch back
WORKER Path
error e.g. SF
ª
¬
®
Fig. 11 Principle of revertive operation
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
13
Protection Features
14
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
2
Traffic Protections
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Protection Features
2.1
MSP Line protection
Duplicated lines in a multiplex section characterize line protection switching. On the receiving side one of the two lines is selected from which to derive the signal. On both lines, transmit side and receive side, two line ports have to be installed. The signals transmitted on both lines are monitored. On the receiving side the switch card selects, based on predefined switching criteria, which line signal will be passed within the switching matrix.
2.2
Path protection
1+1 Path Protection, also named "Sub – Network Connection Protection" (SNCP), is implemented and activated at the cross – connection level. Path protection can be implemented in either linear or ring structures. The data signal is transmitted over two different paths having the same starting and ending termination points. At the ending termination point, the switchover criteria are defined and evaluated. If the received signal on the worker path exceeds the quality thresholds, the signal will be taken from the protection path. The criteria for switching are laid down individually during configuration of the individual devices (evaluation of the Path Overhead). Using path protection, each data signal is transmitted twice: on the worker path and on the protection path. Therefore additional transmission capacity must be provided on the effected line connections. Currently there are two ways to configure a SNCP, the so called Intrusive SNCP (SNCP/I) and the Non Intrusive SNCP (SNCP/N). SNCP/I When an Inherent SNCP protection is configured on an NE, the switching criteria used to go from the working path to the protection one are signal fails, for LO VC the failures would be TU-LOP and TU-AIS or an internal reaction (SSF) related to a higher order failure. SNCP/N In the case of Non Intrusive SNCP additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned previously, the information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes, path trace mismatches and signal label incongruence could also be a motive to switch over. In order to support the SNCP/N protection, the CTPs have to be able to detect alarm conditions related with the VC POH.
16
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Line Protection worker card
worker line
switching matrix
protection line
protection card
Fig. 12 Principle of line protection
Path Protection
Working Path
Protection Path
Switch only one direction shown
Definition of Switching Criteria
Fig. 13 Principle of path protection
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Protection Features
2.3
Multiplex Section – Self Protecting Ring (MSSPRing)
MS-SPRing is also known as Bi – directional Self Healing Ring (BSHR) in other Siemens products The MS-SPRing configuration consists of several network elements whose line interfaces are connected to each other in a form of a ring. During normal operation, path switching generally occurs via the shortest path in order to involve the least number of network elements. If a fault in the multiplex section occurs the data will be looped back at both ends of the faulty section via the protection path. Therefore half of the ring capacity must be reserved for the protection path.
18
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
n . . . Normal Traffic
Worker Protection
n
n
Fig. 14 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring – Normal state
Worker Protection
n . . . Normal Traffic
n
n
Fig. 15 Multiplex Section Self Protecting Ring – Activated State
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Protection Features
2.3.1
2 Fiber MS-SPRing ring
2 Fiber MS-SPRing rings require only two fibers for each span of the ring. Each fiber carries both working channels and protection channels. On each fiber, half the channels are defined as working channels and half are defined as protection channels. The normal traffic carried on working channels in one fiber is protected by the protection channels traveling in the opposite direction around the ring (See Fig. 16). This permits the transport of protected normal traffic and unprotected traffic been carried in the protection channels. If a fault occurs the unprotected traffic will be lost and only the protected traffic carried. Only one set of overhead channels is used on each fiber. 2F MS-SPRing rings support ring switching only. When a ring switch is invoked, the normal traffic is switched from the working channels to the protection channels in the opposite direction.
20
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
2F-MS-SPRING
STM # 1-8
STM # 1-8
worker protection
worker protection
Fiber 1
STM # 9-16
STM # 9-16
STM # 1-8
STM # 1-8 worker protection
worker protection
Fiber 2
STM # 9-16
STM # 9-16
Fig. 16 2F-MS-SPRing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21
Protection Features
2.3.2
Non pre – emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)
With ITU – T recommendation G-841 there is a feature called Non pre – emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT). This allows the selection of VC-4 contains which will be protected by MS-SPRing and which containers will not be protected. With No NUT containers selected VC-4 # 1 to VC-4 # 8 carry traffic and are all protected by VC-4 # 9 to VC-4 # 16. If VC-4 # 3 is selected as a NUT container it will not be protected by MS-SPRing should a fault occur, but it may be protected by another protection method such as SNCP. Should this occur this will also free VC-4 # 11 from protecting VC-4 # 3, so extra unprotected traffic can be carried in this container.
22
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
VC-4 # 16
VC-4 # 9
VC-4 # 8
VC-4 # 1
Non pre-emptible Unprotected Traffic (NUT)
VC-4 # 16
VC-4 # 11
VC-4 # 9
VC-4 # 8
VC-4 # 1
VC-4 # 3
Without NUT
With VC-4 # 3 as a NUT Container Protected Container
Protecting Container
Unprotected Container
Fig. 17 NUT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Protection Features
24
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
3
Equipment protection
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
25
Protection Features
Equipment (module) protection is designed to react in case of card failures. Two types of module protection are supported – 1:N Card Protection and 1+1 Card Protection.
3.1
1:N card protection
The 1:N card protection feature allows the protection of one or more modules by one additional protection card. In the event of a module failure, the traffic of the first module, which fails will be taken over by the protection card.
3.2
1+1 card protection
For 1+1 card protection, an additional module is inserted for protection. This module only protects the traffic of one specified card in case of different events like card failure or operator switch. The signals are offered to both the working and the protection module. Both modules distribute the signal to the next operation card (e.g. the switching network CC) which then chooses one of the two signals, based on predetermined criteria.
26
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1:N Card Protection
1:N
protection module
working modules
Fig. 18 1:N card protection
1+1 Card Protection
working workingmodule module
1+1 1+1
protection protectionmodule module
working module module switch switch
protection module
switching network
Fig. 19 1+1 card protection
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
27
Protection Features
28
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
4
Protection support for SURPASS hiT 7080
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
29
Protection Features
4.1 4.1.1
Traffic Protection MSP protection
In this SURPASS hiT 7080 equipment, 1+1 and 1:N MSP (NMax=14) line protection is available for all SDH interfaces. Worker and Protection ports can be either located on the same card or different cards. There is no limitation regarding the position where the Worker and Protection ports have to be equipped. It is not necessary to configure Worker and Protection ports on neighbor cards. The protection can be configured in order to work with bidirectional or unidirectional switching. Revertive or Non-Revertive operation is possible.
4.1.2
MS-SPRing
2 Fiber MS-SPRing is supported at STM-64, STM-16 and STM-4 levels. In order to increase de bandwidth utilization it is possible to take advantage of low priority traffic and NUT functionalities. In case of multiple ring failure operation, the system builds automatically the corresponding squelch tables using the information given by the configured cross connections. Squelch tables manual configuration is also possible.
4.1.3
Path protection
SNCP protection at all levels is supported. The protection can be configured as Revertive and Non-Revertive. The protection can be configured as SNCP/I or SNCP/N. When the system is configured to work with SNCP/I, it means, only reacting in case of signal fail (HP-SSF or LP-SSF). The SSF alarm arises in case of defects in the signal server layer (e.g. LOS, LOP, AIS, etc). In order to support SNCP/N, the non intrusive monitoring has to be enabled (monitored status) on the CTP. In this case besides the SD and EXC BER, the system can also react in case of TIM.
4.2
Card protection
The following cards support equipment protection in the equipment
• HOCC comprising high order switch matrix and timing protection. • LOCC comprising low order switch matrix. • SC system controller card. • E1 and STM-1 E cards
30
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Summary – Traffic protection hiT 7070
hiT 7060 HC
hiT 7060
hiT 7050 CC
hiT 7050 FP1
hiT 7035
hiT 7030
1+1 MSP
STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64
STM1,4,16,64
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4,16
STM-1,4
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4
STM1,4,16
STM-1,4
1:1 MSP
STM1,4,16,64
1:N MSP
STMSTM1,4,16,64 1,4,16,64 STM4,16,64
STM-4,16
STM-16
STM-4,16
STM-4
STM-4,16
STM-4
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
hiT 7080
BSHR-2
STM4,16,64
STM16,64
BSHR-4
SNCP (LO,HO)
STM16,64
hiT 7025 hiT 7020
All line rates
All line rates
All line rates
Fig. 20 Summary – Traffic Protection
Summary – Protection Features
hiT 7080
hiT 7070
STM-1,4,16,64 port with MSP
1+1
hiT 7060 HC
hiT 7060
STM-1,4,16,64 port with MSP
STM-1,4,16port with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
hiT 7050 CC
hiT 7050 FP1
STM-1,4,16 port with MSP
STM-1,4,16,64 port with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
CLU
CLU
CLU
VC-3/-12 Matrix
PWR
PWR
CLU
SC
PWR
PWR
34/45 Mbps card
34/45 Mbps card
34/45 Mbps card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
VC-4 Matrix
PWR
STM-1,4 port with MSP PWR
hiT 7035
hiT 7025
STM-1,4 port with MSP
STM-1,4 port with MSP
VC-4 Matrix
VC-4 Matrix
VC-3/-12 Matrix
VC_3/-12 Matrix
CLU
CLU
PWR
PWR
34/45 Mbps card
34/45 Mbps card
STM-1e card
STM-1e card
2M card
2M card
34/45 Mbps card
1:N
STM-1e card 2M card
STM-1e card
2M card
2M card
2M card
Fig. 21 Summary – Protection Features
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
31
Protection Features
32
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
5
Protection configuration
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
33
Protection Features
5.1 5.1.1
MSP 1+1 Create MSP 1+1
In order to configure a MSP 1+1 protection: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 2. Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups created on the network element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for specific protection groups. 3. Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection. 4. The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open. 5. The changeable options available in the basic information window pane are:
• MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as MSP 1+1 • Active Mode: Enable by default. This field is used only for 1: N protection. • Port type: Select the bandwidth of the port from the drop-down list (e.g. STM-4) • Group label: Every MSP requires always a Protection Group Label which
identifies it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text String with max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.
• Operation Mode: either Revertive or Non – Revertive. • Switch Direction: either Unidirectional Switch or Bidirectional Switch. • Working Channel number: The working channel number is displayed in the text box.
• Extra traffic: Select Enable or Disable from the drop-down list when the MSP mode is set as MSP 1:N
• Wait to Restore: only available if Revertive operation has been selected. A value between 60 seconds and 720 seconds (300 seconds by default).
6. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section". 7. Select "Card" and "Port" for "Working Multiplex section". 8. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group. An "Information" window will pop – up. TIP There is no restriction which card / port is selected as working and which one is selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as long as the STM level is the same 9. Press the "OK" button to confirm.
34
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2 1
Fig. 22 Creating MSP 1+1 protection I
4
5
6
7 1 8 3 9
3
Fig. 23 Creating MSP 1+1 protection II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Protection Features
WARNING MSP can not be created if there are cross – connections on the protection line.
TIP If the TP Multiplex Structure is different for the worker and the protection line, a notifying message box will be displayed. If Yes is clicked on the message box, the worker line structure will be applied to the protection line.
WARNING If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.
36
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Fig. 24 Creating MSP 1+1 protection III
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Protection Features
5.1.2
View / Modify MSP
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 1) Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP lines configured on the network element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups. 2) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired MSP group from the list. The background line color will turn to blue. 3) Click the "View/Modify" button. The "View/Modify MSP Property" window will pop up. 4) It is possible to change the following parameters:
• Wait to Restore • Group Label 5) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change the configuration. An "Information" window will pop up. 6) Click the "OK" button to confirm.
38
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 25 View/Modify MSP I
5 3
7 6 3
3 4
Fig. 26 View/Modify MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
39
Protection Features
5.1.3
Switch MSP
1) Open the "MSP Management" window. To switch between the working and Protection lines, select the desired MSP. 2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window. 3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:
• Current Highest Switch Request • Switch Status • Operator Command Card/Port • External command • Working and Protection port signal status. 4) To switch between worker and Protection lines select the "Operator Command Card/Port" from list. 5) Select the "External Command" from list. The options available are:
• Clear: Clearance for automatic switching (internal switch request). • Lockout of Protection (LP): Forced fixed through – connection on the operating path by "locking" (not be used) the protection path.
• Forced Switch: Forced fixed through – connection on the other path. • Manual Switch: Through – connection on the other path, if this is free from errors. Remain on the existing path if there is found errors.
6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration. 7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending you will get a corresponding message and your last command will not be executed. TIP Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or "Manual" Switch without first clearing the current command.
40
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 27 Switch MSP I
4
3 7
5
6 7
Fig. 28 Switch MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
41
Protection Features
5.1.4
MSP Deletion
1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 2. Press the "Query" button to get a list of all MSP groups configured on the network element. 3. Select the desired MSP to be deleted from list. 4. Press the "Delete" button 5. Press the "Yes" button to confirm.
42
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 29 Delete MSP I
3
5 4
Fig. 30 Delete MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
43
Protection Features
5.2 5.2.1
MSP 1:N Create MSP 1:N
In order to configure a MSP 1: N protection: 1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the network element, if there is any. You can set "Query Conditions" to filter for specific protection groups. 3) Press the "Create" button to create a new MSP line protection. 4) The "Create Linear MSP Group" window will open. In the top of this window, there are changeable options available in the basic information window pane:
• MSP Mode: Set the MSP mode as "MSP 1:N" • Active Mode: Set to "Enable" to activate protection group • Port type: Select STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, or STM-64 from the drop-down list • Group Label: Every MSP line requires a Protection Group Label which identifies it from other created MSP protections on the Network element. Text String with max. 64 characters. Must not contain "space" character.
• Operation Mode: always set to "Revertive" • Switch Direction: always set to "Bi – directional Switch" • Wait to Restore: this field is only available if "Revertive" operation has been selected. The input value is between 60 seconds and 720 seconds.
• Extra Traffic: can be set to "Enable" disable if the protection port will be used for extra-traffic or not.
5) Select "Card" and "Port" for "Protection Multiplex section". 6) Click "Add" button to add all the working ports in the "Working Multiplex section".
44
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 31 Creating 1:N MSP protection I
4
5 4 6
3
Fig. 32 Creating 1:N MSP protection II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
45
Protection Features
7) Select "Working Card" from list 8) Select "Working Port" from list 9) Select "Priority" from list 10) Repeat steps 6 to 9 for additional working ports into the working multiplex section. 11) Click the "Apply or Ok" button to create the MSP group. 12) Information windows will pop-up. Click the "OK" button to finish the MSP creation. TIP There is no restriction on which card / port is selected as working and which one is selected as protection. The ports can be on the same card or on any other as long as the STM level is the same
WARNING If the DCCs in the protection line are activated, the system will deactivate them before the protection is created. The NE will ask for a confirmation. Check on the remote NE if the DCC in the worker line are activated and up in order to prevent loosing communication before deactivating the protection line DCCs.
46
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
7
8
9 10
11
12
Fig. 33 Creating 1:N MSP protection II
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
Protection Features
5.2.2
View / Modify MSP
1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the network element. The list will show the status of existing MSP groups. 3) To get detailed information about worker and protection lines select the desired MSP group. 4) Click the "View / Modify" button. The "View / Modify MSP Property" window will pop up. 5) As long as the MSP 1:N is in the Active Mode "Enable" it is possible to change the following parameters:
• Wait to Restore • Group Label 6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration. An "Information" window will pop up. 7) Click the "OK" button to confirm.
48
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 34 View/Modify 1:N MSP I
5
3 6 7
7 4
Fig. 35 View/Modify 1: N MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Protection Features
8) Set "Active Mode" for the MSP 1: N to the "Disable". 9) Press the "Apply" button to change the configuration. An "Information" window will pop up. 10) Click the "OK" button to confirm. 11) Now it is possible to modify the members of the existing MSP group. Select the channel number you want to modify. 12) Select Working Card, Working Port or Priority column and select item from list. 13) It is also possible to add or remove Worker lines to and from the MSP group. Select "Add" or "Delete" button correspondingly. In case you add a new worker line to the group you need to define the Working Card, Port and Priority for the new channel. TIP In case that the number of worker channels need to be reduced it must be done sequentially deleting the channel with the highest number first. It is not possible to delete any other channel selectively. 14) After making all the changes, there is mandatory to set Enable the Active Mode of the protection 15) Once more press the "Apply or Ok" button to make your configuration changes permanent. 16) An Information window will pop up. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
50
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
8
9
10
Fig. 36 View/Modify MSP III
14 Only the port with the highest Channel number can be deleted first
12 13 12 11 15 11
16
Fig. 37 View/Modify 1:N MSP III
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
51
Protection Features
5.2.3
Switch MSP
1) Open the "MSP Management" window and select the desired MSP, the background color will turn to blue. 2) Click the "Switch" button to open the "Switch MSP" window. 3) The "Switch MSP" popup window will display:
• Current Highest Switch Request • Switch Status • Current Signal State of Working and Protection lines 4) To switch between Worker and Protection lines select the "Operator command Card/Port" from list. 5) Select the "External Command" you want to issue to the selected Card/Port from list. 6) Press the "Apply or Ok" button to change configuration. 7) Note that if a higher priority command is pending or you try to switch a lower priority channel you will get a corresponding message and your last command will not be executed. TIP Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from "Lockout" to "Force" or "Manual Switch" without first clearing the current command.
52
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 38 Switch 1:N MSP I
4
3 2
5
6 5
Fig. 39 Switch 1:N MSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
53
Protection Features
5.2.4
MSP Deletion
1) From "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration Æ MSP Management. 2) Press the "Query" button to view the MSP groups already configured on the network element. 3) Select the desired MSP to be deleted. 4) Press the "Delete" button. 5) Click "Yes" button to confirm.
54
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 40 Delete 1:N MSP I
3
5
4
Fig. 41 Delete 1:NMSP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Protection Features
5.3 5.3.1
Path protection Create SNCP
TIP In order to create a protected path, the worker path has to be created first. Means is mandatory create the cross – connection from the working path. To create the protection path 1) Select Configuration Æ Cross - Connection Management from the chassis main menu. An empty window will appear. 2) Press the Batch Create SNCP button to add SNCP protection to a cross – connection. 3) Configure the SNCP behavior: Capacity: VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12. Direction: Bidirectional, Source, Sink. This refers to the CC type to be used, not to the protection switching protocol. When source is selected, the CC is unidirectional and this is the bridge end point. When Sink is selected, the CC is unidirectional and this is the switch end point. When bidirectional is selected, the end point is switch and bridge at the same time. Restore Mode: Revertive, Non – Revertive (only when Bidirectional direction is selected). Wait to Restore Time: only when Revertive operation is selected (the minimal time is 60 seconds and maximum time is 720 seconds). 300 sec by default. Label: SNCP protection name, this field is mandatory. No blank spaces are accepted. Hold of Time: Hold of Time is used when SNCP uses paths routed through protected sections. The idea behind is to allow the section protection react before trying a SNCP protection switching in case of a failure in the section layer. Intrusive Mode: a) SNC/I: the switching criteria used to go from the working path to the protection one are signal fails (AIS and LOP), or the internal reaction (SSF) to a higher order failure. SD is not used as criteria to switch over b) SNC/N: additionally to the Signal Failures mentioned previously, the information inside the VC POH is considered. So BIP error codes, path trace mismatches and signal label incongruence are also reasons to switch over. In order to support the SNCP/N protection, the corresponding CTPs alarm monitoring has to be enabled. 4) Select the working point, Card and Port. The SDH card where the path is going to be routed through has to be selected, not the path end point. Only cross – connected CTPs are shown on the card and port selected.
56
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 42 Creation of SNCP Protection I
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Protection Features
Once the working CTP has been selected, the other cross – connection member is shown on the "Source/Destination TP" field. 5) Select the protecting card, port and CTP. 6) Press Apply or OK to add protection onto the unprotected cross – connection. 7) There will appear a dialog window, where informs about the creation state of the protection. When it finish, will appear an information window where informs the successful of the protection. Press OK to go back to the Cross - Connect Management window.
58
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
3
Source TP will be displayed when is selected the right Working TP
5
4
6 2
7
Fig. 43 Creation of SNCP Protection II
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Protection Features
5.3.2
View / Switch SNCP
To view and or switch a protected Cross –connection: 1) Go to Configuration Æ Cross - Connect Management. 2) Press Query button, to look all cross – connections. 3) Select the desire protection (all the line will turn to blue background) and click in View button. The "Detail of Cross – Connection" window will open. 4) To obtain the current SNCP status and / or to issue maintenance commands click the "Switch" button. The "SNCP Switch" window will pop up. The following status information will be displayed:
• Active Path • Current Request • Working Signal State • Protection Signal State 5) Choose maintenance command from list. The commands available are: Clear: No operator command. System chooses working path when it is in normal state. Wait to Restore time is not considered. Lockout of Protection: the selected path is the working one. Protection is blocked for this NE Forced Switch to Working: selected path is working even been the path is failed Forced Switch to Protection: selected path is protection even been the path is failed Manual Switch to Working: selected path is working if the signal is in normal state. Manual Switch to Protection: selected path is protection if the signal is in normal state. 6) Click the "Apply" button to execute the command. TIP Each item in the Command drop down menu has a priority. The list is sorted with the highest priority first. E.g. it is not possible to change from Lockout to Force or Manual Switch without first clearing the current command.
60
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 44 View / Switch SNCP I
3 4
5
6
4
Fig. 45 View / Switch SNCP II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
61
Protection Features
5.3.3
Modify SNCP Protection Properties
To modify the protection properties of an existing protected cross – connection: 1. Select Configuration Æ Cross - Connect Management. The Cross - Connect Management window will pop-up. 2. Press Query button to get all cross – connections. 3. From the list in the "Cross – Connection Management" window select the cross – connection you want to modify. 4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross – Connection" window will pop up. 5. Change the Protection properties as required. 6. Click "Modify" button to make your changes permanent. After completion of the command an "Information" box will pop up. 7. Click on "OK" button in the "Information" box to confirm.
62
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 46 Modify SNCP Protection Properties I
7 5
3
6 4
Fig. 47 Modify SNCP Protection Properties II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
63
Protection Features
5.3.4
Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross – connection
To remove protection from a protected cross – connection: 1. From the list in the "Cross – Connection Management" window select the protected cross – connection you want to modify. 2. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross – Connection" window will pop up. 3. Select Working or Protection channel which should be still used in the cross – connection. TIP Make sure, that the currently active path is the one which you still keep in your configuration; otherwise a short traffic hit will occur. 4. Click the "Convert to CC" button to remove the other channel. A "Confirmation" window will pop up. 5. Click the "Yes" button if you want to proceed with the action selected. An "Information" window will pop up. 6. Click "OK" button to confirm.
64
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
5
6
1 3 2
4
Fig. 48 Remove Protection from existing Protected Cross-Connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Protection Features
5.3.5
Add protection to existing Unprotected Cross – connection
To add a protection path to an unprotected cross – connection: 1. From the list in the "Cross – Connection Management" window select the unprotected cross – connection you want to modify. 2. Click the "Modify" button. The "Modify Cross – Connection" window will pop up. 3. Change the "Type" of cross – connection to "Bidirectional Protected Tail End" or "Bidirectional Protected Head End" as appropriate. 4. Configure "TP A Protection" or "TP Z Protection" respectively: Select Card, Port and AU-4 number from list 5. Configure the Protection Properties as required. 6. Click the "Add Protection" button to add the protection path. An "Information" window will pop up. 7. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
66
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
3 7 4
5
1
6 2
Fig. 49 Add protection to an unprotected cross-connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Protection Features
5.3.6
Delete SNCP
To delete a protected Cross – Connection: 1) From the list in the "Cross – Connection Management" window select the desire cross – connection to be deleted. 2) Click the "Delete" button. A "Confirmation" dialog box will pop up. 3) Press "Yes" on the "Confirmation" dialog box. The cross – connection will be deleted (Progress is shown in separate window). An "Information" box will pop up when the deletion is completed. 4) Press "Yes" on the "Information" box.
68
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
3
4
2
Fig. 50 Deleting a protected cross-connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
Protection Features
5.4 5.4.1
E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 Electrical Card Protection Create card protection
In order to enable card protection for the E1; E3/DS3 and STM-1 cards, please follow these procedures: 1. Go to Configuration Æ EPG Management. A new window will pop up. 2. The windows show the existing protections. In order to create a new one, press Create button. In this new window there are several settings to select: 3. EPG type: Set the kind of card protection to enable: 1: N E1; 1: N E3DS3 or 1: N STM-1E. 4. Revertive mode: Revertive by default to all the cases. 5. Protection card: According with the protection type, the equipment will detect automatically if the card is placed into the protection slot and will displayed the card into this field. In the case of STM-1 E, since there is two possible equipping groups into the hiT 7080, select the right protecting card to enable the protection. 6. Wait to restore: Set the maximum recover time from 0 up to 720 seconds (the default value is 300 sec). 7. Click in the arrows to select and/or remove the desire working cards from the list. 8. Click Create button to activate the protection. 9. An information window will pop up, mentioning about the successful EPG. Click Ok to confirm. 10. A confirmation window will ask to enable the EPG. Press Yes button. 11. An information window will pop up, click Ok.
70
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 51 Create EPG I
3 4 6 5 7 6
8
9 10 11
Fig. 52 Create EPG II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
71
Protection Features
5.4.2
Modify EPG
In order to modify one of the existing card protections, follow these steps: 1. Go to Configuration ÆEPG Management. The EPG Management window will pop up. 2. Select from the available list he desire protection. The background color will turn to blue. 3. Click Modify to have access to the modifications. The Modify EPG window will pop up. 4. Select the working card which will be excluded and click the left arrow button to move it to the Available working card area. 5. Click Enable to enable the modified EPG and click OK to confirm the enabled function. 6. Click Apply to confirm the modification and click Close to close the window. 7. The EPG is now configured as desired.
72
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
2
Fig. 53 EPG modifications I
4
5
6
Fig. 54 EPG modifications II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
73
Protection Features
5.4.3
Switching EPG
In order to switch EPG, please complete the following steps: 1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration Æ EPG Management menu item. The “EPG Management” window is opened. 2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information. 3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Switch to open the “EPG External Command” window. 4) Select the desired item from the External Command drop-down list. 5) When Forced Switch to Protection or Manual Switch to Protection is selected, the Working cards drop-down list is enabled. Select the desired working card. 6) Click Apply or OK to confirm the settings. 7) An information window will pop up with the successful of the action. Click OK to close the window.
74
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
3 2
2
Fig. 55 Switching EPG I
5 4
6 5
7
Fig. 56 Switching EPG II
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
75
Protection Features
5.4.4
Delete Card Protection
In order to delete an EPG, please complete the following steps: 1) In the chassis main menu, select Configuration Æ EPG Management menu item. The “Equipment Protection Group Management” window is opened. 2) Click Refresh to query all EPG information. 3) Select an item in the list by highlighting it in blue and click Delete to delete the EPG. 4) Click Yes in the “Title_Confirmation” window to confirm deleting. 5) Another Confirmation window will pop up to communicate that the system will proceed to remove the protection. Press Yes to confirm.
76
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
4 3 2
5 2
Fig. 57 EPG deletion process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
Protection Features
5.5
HOCC card protection
HOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two switch cards inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks. To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED on the card. This can be seen either on the card or on the LCT program. Switching between the two cards can be performed by: 1) Selecting Configuration Æ CC 1+1 Protection Æ HOCC 1+1 Protection from the chassis main menu. 2) This window will display:
• Current operation state of each card • Current Latch State of each card • Current Active Card • Current Request 3) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting the appropriate Switch Request. 4) Press the "Apply" button. The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has two latches, at the top and at the bottom. They are used to extract/ insert the card on the shelf and also to keep it fixed. There is an internal switch associated with the top latch. When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.
78
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1 Card status
2 3 4
Fig. 58 HOCC card protection: Software switching
Switch
Fig. 59 HOCC 1+1 card protection: Hardware switching
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
79
Protection Features
5.6
LOCC Card protection
LOCC Switch Card protection is self configuring whenever there are two or four switch cards inserted on the hiT 7080 subracks. To identify which switch card is currently active an operator can look at the ACT LED on the card(s). This can be seen either on the card(s) or on the LCT program. 1) To look the actual state as well the bandwidth capacity configured into the 7080, select Configuration Æ CC 1+1 Protection Æ LOCC Capacity Management from the chassis main menu. This will display:
• Current capacity of the LOCC • Current state of each card From this menu as well is defined the bandwidth capacity for hiT 7080 will have. To define what should be the total bandwidth, just select into the LOCC capacity field the desire LO capacity. 2) Switching between the two cards can be performed by selecting Configuration Æ CC 1+1 Protection Æ LOCC 1+1 Protection from the chassis main menu. 3) This will display:
• Capacity of the LOCC • Last switch status • Switching status • Current state for the working card • Current state for the protection card 4) An operator can perform a "Manual Switch" between the two cards by selecting the appropriate Switch Request. TIP LOCC1 are the Slot 5 and 6 (working slots), because the system see as one card and LOCC2 are the Slots 7 and 8 (protection slots). 5) Press the "Apply" button. The switching can be also performed by means of the hardware. The CC card has two latches, one at the top and the other one at the bottom. They are used to extract/ insert the card on the shelf and also to keep it fixed. When the respective latch is pressed on the active the card it will initiate the switchover. The reason for this is to detect that a card is going to be extracted and make the changeover before it happens. This allows for shorter traffic interruptions.
80
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Fig. 60 LOCC Capacity Management
1
2
3 4
Fig. 61 LOCC 1+ 1 Protection
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
81
Protection Features
5.7
System Controller Card Protection
SC 1 + 1 protection prevents SC functions from failing, including failure of software tasks and MIB files, and guarantees at least one SC card is working in the normal state and the system can provide continuous service. To trigger the SC 1 + 1 protection switch, complete the following steps: 1) In the chassis main menu, select the Configuration Æ SC 1+1 Protection menu item. The “SC 1+1 Protection” window is opened. 2) The user can view the basic information of both SC cards. 3) If it is necessary to switch the SC card, the user can select the desired request item from the Switch request drop-down list. 4) Click Apply or Ok to confirm the settings and close the window. When the SC 1+1 switch is triggered, all the card with exception of the CC card will turn into the fault state for several seconds, but is doesn't affect the traffic. After several seconds, they will turn to the normal state. TIP There must be at least a six minutes interval between successive SC 1 + 1 switches to ensure system stability
82
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
1
3 2
1 4 Fig. 62 SC switching procedures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
Protection Features
84
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
6
Exercise
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
85
Protection Features
86
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Exercise 1 Title: MSP 1+1 Configuration
Objectives: Setup and check the MSP 1+1 protection
Pre-requisite: Active NEs connected together via redundant lines
Task Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 63 Team Assignment
Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 64 and the tables below. Common MSP 1+1 configuration parameters for all teams:
• MSP Mode: 1+1 • Port Type: STM-4 • Wait To Restore: 60 seconds • Group Label: One+One • Switch Direction: Bidirectional • Operation Mode: Revertive FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
87
Protection Features
Team specific parameters for Worker and Protection lines: Team 1: NE Leipzig Worker channel
Card
Port
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P01 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P01 (STM-4)
Team 2: NE Potsdam Channel
Card
Port
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P02 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P02 (STM-4)
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P01 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P01 (STM-4)
Team 3: NE Landau Channel
Card
Port
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P02 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P02 (STM-4)
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P01 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
Team 4: NE Wuppertal Worker channel
Card
Port
Working Multiplex Section
Slot 16
P02 (STM-4)
Protection Multiplex Section
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
Now, according with your team, proceed to make the following cross – connections
88
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Team
Type
Capacity
Label
TPA
TPZ Slot 16. Port # 1
1
Bidirectional
VC-12
One+One
LC1. Port #1
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
2
3
Bidirectional
Bidirectional
VC-12
VC-12
One+One
One+One
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16.Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2 4
Bidirectional
VC-12
One+One
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
89
Protection Features
1 + 1 MSP: MUX Plan DDF
2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
STM 4 STM 4 1 + 1 MSP
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 16#5 #5 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C C 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) Slot 7080 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 25 #5
Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2 STM 16
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1 STM 4
C C 1
Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
STM 4
STM 4
LC 1 #1
Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
1 + 1 MSP
STM 16
LC 1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 17 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 7080 Wuppertal Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) 1 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 C 10.10.6.40 16 #8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #5 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4 1 + 1 MSP STM 4
DDF
Fig. 64 1 +1 MSP: Mux Plan
Query 1. Configure the MSP and the cross-connection as stated above. 2. Once your partner teams have finished the configuration settings, check if the MSP protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a "Normal" switch status. 3. Once checked the working line is carrying the traffic, make sure that there is no switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of the instructor check the normal traffic is up and running on the measurement instruments. 4.
Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser in one of the worker line section and verify if the protection line is selected. Verify also if the measurement instrument still has normal traffic. If this is not the case, find out the reason.
5. Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the working line. Is the traffic switched back to the working line? If not, find out the reason. 6. When all the previous steps have been completed, please delete all the MSP protection and cross – connections.
90
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 65 End of exercise 1
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
91
Protection Features
Exercise 2 Title: MSP 1:N Configuration
Objectives: Setup and verify a MSP 1:N protection
Pre-requisite: Active NEs connected together via redundant lines
Task Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 66 Team Assignment
Each team has to configure a CC and a MSP according to the details given in Fig. 67 and in the tables below. Common MSP 1:N configuration parameters for all teams:
• MSP Mode: 1:N • Port Type: STM-4 • Wait To Restore: 60 seconds. • Group Label: One2N
92
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
Team specific parameters Worker and Protection lines: Team 1: NE Leipzig Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
1
Slot 16
P01 (STM-4)
High
2
Slot 17
P01 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
Team 2: Potsdam Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
1
Slot 16
P02 (STM-4)
High
2
Slot 17
P02 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
Team 3: Landau Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
1
Slot 16
P01 (STM-4)
High
2
Slot 17
P01 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
Team 4: Wuppertal Worker channel
Working Card
Working Port
Priority
1
Slot 16
P02 (STM-4)
High
2
Slot 17
P02 (STM-4)
Low
Protection Card
Protection Port
Slot 17
P03 (STM-4)
According with your team, proceed now with the following cross – connections:
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
93
Protection Features
Team
Type
Level
Name
TPA
TPZ Slot 16. Port # 1
TH
LC1. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
1
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
TH
2
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
TH
3
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
Slot 16. Port # 5
Slot17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 7
Slot17. Port # 3
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU - 4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port #1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 16. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2
Slot 17. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 17. Port # 3
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 16. Port # 2 TH
AU-4 # 1
Slot 25. Port # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1 4
Bidirectional
VC-12
TL
EXT
94
Slot 17. Port # 2
Slot 24. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 17. Port # 3
Slot 24. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
STM-1 Optical
1:N MSP: MUX Plan EXTRA
Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70 Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
LC 1 #1
C C 1
W1 (H)
STM 4
W2 (L) Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
STM 4
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 25#5 #1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 16 #5 16 C C 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) Slot 7080 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
2 Mbps Electrical
DDF
STM 4
EXT Shelf
TEAM 1 TEAM 2 STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM-1 Electrical
STM 16
Set to Inward loopback Set to Inward loopback
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #2 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot24 #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 #1
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) 1 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 10.10.6.40 16C#8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2 W2 (L)
TEAM 4
STM 4
TEAM 3
STM 4
W1 (H) EXTRA
EXT Shelf
STM 4
DDF
Fig. 67 1:N MSP: Mux Plan
Query 1) Configure and enable the MSP. Setup the cross-connection as stated above. 2) Once your partner teams have finished with the configuration, check if the MSP protection is using the configured working lines. This is indicated by a "Normal" switch status. 3) Make sure that there is no switch request pending on the MSP. With the help of the instructor check that the normal traffic as well as the extra traffic is up and running on the measurement instruments.
Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority) Worker 2 (Low Priority) Extra Traffic
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
95
Protection Features
4) Ask your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W2(L) between NE "Leipzig" and the NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows. Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority) Worker 2 (Low Priority) Extra Traffic 5) Now request to your instructor to shutdown the laser on the worker line W1(H) between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows. Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority) Worker 2 (Low Priority) Extra Traffic 6) Ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W2(L) between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam". Verify the traffic flows. Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority) Worker 2 (Low Priority) Extra Traffic
96
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
7) Finally, ask your instructor to enable the laser again on the worker line W1(H) between NE "Leipzig" and NE "Potsdam" and check the traffic flows. Traffic Flow
OK
NOT OK
Worker 1 (High Priority) Worker 2 (Low Priority) Extra Traffic 8) At the end, please delete the MSP and all cross – connections created.
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 68 End of exercise 2
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
97
Protection Features
Exercise 3 Title: Path Protection
Objectives: Setup and Test a Path protection
Pre-requisite: Active NEs connected together via alternate routes
Task Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 69 Team Assignment
Team 1 and 4 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in Fig. 70. Team 2 and 3 has to configure a SNCP protection according to the details given in Fig. 71.
98
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
SNCP for Team 1 and 4 : MUX Plan STM 4 Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70 Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
LC 1 #1
C C 1
STM 4 STM 4 Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 25#5 #1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C C 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) Slot 7080 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
EXT Shelf
2 Mbps Electrical
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 16
LC 1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 10.10.6.40 16C#8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 4
STM 4 STM 4
DDF
Fig. 70 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 1 and 4
Common SNCP configuration parameters:
• Type: Bidirectional • Circuit Label: SNCP • Capacity: VC-12 • Restore Mode: Revertive • Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N • Wait To Restore: 60 seconds • Hold Off Time: 0
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
99
Protection Features
According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross – connections: Team
Equipment Name
Leipzig
SNCP
1 Potsdam
Landau
SNCP
SNCP
4 Wuppertal
100
SNCP
Source TP
Working TP
Protection TP
(TPA)
(TPZ)
(TPZ')
Slot 2. Port # 2
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
LC1. Port # 1 Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 2
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 25. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1
AU-4 # 1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
SNCP for Team 2 and 3: MUX Plan STM 4 Leipzig Extension Shelf 172.16.8.65 10.10.6.70 Slot CC1 C C Slot 2 CC2
LC 1 #1
C C 1
STM 4 STM 4 Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 25#5 #1 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 25 #1 16 C C 7080 Potsdam (P) (P) Slot 7080 Potsdam 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C3 Slot C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 17 #5
EXT Shelf
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 2
STM 16 2 Mbps Electrical
LC 1 #1
C C 2 Slot CC1 C Slot C CC2 1
Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 16 #5 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) 1 7080 Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 10.10.6.40 16C#8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 16 #5 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #1 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4 Wuppertal Extension Shelf 172.16.8.67 10.10.6.100
TEAM 3
STM 4 STM 4
DDF
Fig. 71 SNCP Mux Plan: Team 2 and 3
Common SNCP configuration parameters:
• Type: Bidirectional • Circuit Label: SNCP • Capacity: VC-12 • Restore Mode: Revertive • Intrusive Mode: SNCP/N • Wait To Restore: 60 seconds • Hold Off Time: 0 According with your assigned team, please procedure to make the following cross – connections:
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
101
Protection Features
Team
Equipment Name
Leipzig
SNCP
2 Potsdam
Landau
SNCP
SNCP
3 Wuppertal
SNCP
Source TP
Working TP
Protection TP
(TPA)
(TPZ)
(TPZ')
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 25. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 3. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
LC1. Port # 1
Slot 2. Port # 1
Slot 3. Port # 1
AU-4 # 2
AU-4 # 2
TU-12 # 1.1.1
TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query 1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no errors detected for the test path 2) Check if the SNCP is using the worker path. If not, switchover the traffic to the worker path, verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement instruments. Make sure the protection is in the normal status. 3) Ask your instructor to interrupt the traffic over the working path and verify on the NE that the traffic switched to the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement instruments. 4) Repair the worker path and verify that the traffic switches back after the WTR timer has expired. 5) Delete the protection path. Verify the traffic flow with the help of the measurement instruments. 6) Once all the previous steps have been completed, delete the protection and remaining cross – connections.
102
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
FINISH.
I’ve got it !
Fig. 72 End of exercise 3
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
103
Protection Features
Exercise 4 Title: Card Protection
Objectives: Setup and Test a card protection
Pre-requisite: Active NEs connected together via alternate routes
Task Ask your instructor for the name of your team (e.g. student01), name and IP address of the network element which will be used for the exercises (e.g. NE name: Leipzig, NE IP address: 172.16.8.61, NE management IP address: 10.10.6.10/ 255.255.255.240) and write it down in the list below.
I am working with the team:
student _ _
Name of the real NE: ____________________ NE IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT IP address :
__ . __ . __ . __
MGMT Net Mask :
__ . __ . __ . __
Fig. 73 Team Assignment
From this exercise will perform both STM-1 and E1 card protection. In a way to create these protections, please follow the MUX diagram in Fig. 74.
104
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Protection Features
E1 + STM-1 Card Protection : MUX Plan Set to Inward loopback
STM 4 2 Mbps Electrical
STM 4 STM 4
Slot 16 C #8 C Slot 2 17 #8
Slot Slot Slot Slot LC13 25#5 #2 17 #3 16 #1 17 #1 LC7 #1#2 7080 7080 Leipzig Leipzig (L) (L) Slot 3 172.16.8.61 172.16.8.61 #1 10.10.6.10 10.10.6.10 LC7
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot #8 17 #2 16 #2 17 #3 24 #1 16 C C 7080 Slot 7080 Potsdam Potsdam (P) (P) 2 Slot 2 172.16.8.62 17 #8 172.16.8.62 #1 10.10.6.20 10.10.6.20 C Slot 3 C Slot 2 Slot Slot Slot #1 1 #2 17 #5 16 #1 17 #1
STM 16
C2 Slot C Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot #2 #1 1 16 #2 17 #2 #2 24 #1
EXT Shelf
TEAM 2
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
STM 16
STM 4
STM 4
TEAM 1
STM 16
TEAM 4
TEAM 3 Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 Slot 3 16 #1 17 #1 24 #1 #2 #2 #1 7080 Wuppertal 7080 Wuppertal (W) (W) Slot 2 172.16.8.63 172.16.8.63 Slot #1 10.10.6.50 10.10.6.50 16 #8
2 Mbps Electrical
Slot Slot 2 Slot Slot C 17 #5 #2 16 #2 17 #2 Slot 2 C #1 7080 1 7080 Landau Landau (LD) (LD) Slot 3 172.16.8.64 172.16.8.64 Slot #1 10.10.6.40 10.10.6.40 16C#8 C Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 2 17 #1 16 #1 17 #3 24 #1 17 #8
STM 16
Slot Slot Slot Slot Slot 17 #8 25 #2 17 #3 16 #2 17 #2
EXT Shelf
STM 4
Set to Inward loopback
STM 4 STM 4
Fig. 74 E1 + STM-1 card protection MUX Plan
Proceed with the following settings:
Team
NE
EPG Type
Working Card
Protecting card
WTR
1
Leipzig
1:N E1
Slot 25
Slot 26
30 (sec)
2
Potsdam
1:N STM-1 E
Slot 24
Slot 28
30 (sec)
4
Wuppertal
1:N E1
Slot 25
Slot 26
30 (sec)
3
Landau
1:N STM-1 E
Slot 24
Slot 28
30 (sec)
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
105
Protection Features
Create the following Cross – connection Team
NE
Type
Level
Name
TPA
TPZ Slot 3. Port # 1
1
Leipzig
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
Slot 25. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 2. Port # 1 2
Potsdam
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 3. Port # 1
3
Landau
Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
Slot 24. Port # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 24. Port # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1 Slot 2. Port # 1
4
Wuppertal Bidirectional
VC-12
CP
Slot 25. Port # 2
AU-4 # 1 TU-12 # 1.1.1
Query 1) Ask the instructor to setup the measurement instrument, and verify there are no errors detected for the test path. 2) Check where the traffic is going in which E1 card and in which STM-1 E card. 3) Require to your instructor to plugged out the card in Slot 25 in Leipzig and Wuppertal, or execute an internal switch request through the software. Check the protection state status on both protections and the test analyzer if the traffic is still running. 4) Repeat the same procedures now for the Slot 24 in Potsdam and Landau. Once all the previous steps have been reached and fulfilled, delete the protection and remaining cross – connections.
106
FT52426EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Maintenance
Contents 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 3 3.1
Alarm handling Basic information General definitions Alarm displays Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration Basic Troubleshooting SDH alarm scheme Optical safety management Reboot and shutdown Test management Basic fault clearance Site Maintenance General card replacement procedures
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3 4 6 8 20 41 42 46 48 50 58 61 62
1
Maintenance
2
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
Alarm handling
Fig. 1
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Maintenance
1.1
Basic information
Fault Management is concerned with the detection, localization, isolation and reporting of failures on the transmission signals processed by the hiT 7080 and on the hiT 7080 equipment itself. The signal and equipment failures are differentiated in two failure classes:
• transmission failures • equipment failures In addition to these two failure categories the hiT 7080 supports external alarm contacts (MDI, MDO), which can be used for signaling any kind external events. Failures are reported via the management interface to the OS and may also lead to alarm indications at the TNMS-C (card indications, NE indications). A list of current alarms is kept for every NE and is updated according to changes reported by the respective NE.
4
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
hiT 7080 Alarms TNMS
History Alarms Active Alarms Raised alarms
Fig. 2 SURPASS hiT7080 alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
Maintenance
1.2
General definitions
Alarm Severity Depending on the significance of the alarm messages and the alarm severity assigned to them, they trigger different reactions. A minor fault which, for example, has the effect of degrading the transmission signal (increased bit error rate) usually has no significant effect on operation; for this reason, it results in a low priority alarm message (“minor”). In contrast, serious faults can cause an interruption of service and therefore result in a high priority alarm message (“major”), which requires immediate fault clearance. There are four classes of alarm priorities:
• Critical (red high-light): Critical alarm • Major (orange high-light): Major alarm • Minor (yellow high-light): Alarm of no great significance • Warning (blue high-light): Alarm acting as a warning Alarm Types
• Traffic related: Communication alarms: The communication alarms originate at TPs (termination Points). Quality of Service Alarms: The QoS alarms originate from TPs with performance measurements and thresholds cross notifications.
• Equipment related: Equipment alarms: The equipment alarms originate from specific cards. Environmental alarms: Environmental alarms are external alarms. Processing error alarms: The processing error alarms originate from Software. Clear Status
• Cleared: This status indicates the alarm is no longer active. The alarm will remain in the LCT Active Alarm list until it is acknowledged. Once the alarm is acknowledged is will show up on the LCT History Alarms list
• Not Cleared: Indicates the alarm is still active on the Network element. Not Cleared Alarms are shown on the LCT Active Alarms list
• Cleared Manually: Indicates the current operator has cleared this alarm on this
LCT. Note this alarm will return to Not Cleared status when the operator logs out and in again or performs alarm synchronization.
After having received an alarm-raised notification the LCT assumes that this alarm is present until a corresponding alarm cleared notification is received .
6
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Alarm Types: Communications:
Associated with procedures and/or processes required to convey information from one point to another
Quality of service:
Associated degradation in the quality of a service
Processing error:
Associated software or processing fault
Equipment:
Associated equipment fault
Environmental:
Associated condition relating to an enclosure in which the equipment resides
Alarm event types : Not Cleared:
Indicates the beginning of a certain alarm
Cleared:
Indicates the clearing of a previously reported alarm
Cleared Manually: Indicated Alarm is acknowledged.
Fig. 3 Alarm types and events
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Maintenance
1.3
Alarm displays
1.3.1
Input Power Monitoring
Input Power monitoring is performed by the SC card. Status LEDs at the power I/O section indicate that the corresponding power supply is on. See Fig. 4.
1.3.2
Alarm LEDs on SI and SI-E card
On hiT 7080 the NE summary alarm indications are shown on the front panel of the System Interface. Three LED's indicate the network element alarm conditions. Label Color
Status
Description
CR
ON
One or more critical non – communication alarms are present.
Red
Flashing One or more critical communication alarms are present. LED test (Note1). SI card is initialization. (Note2) OFF MJ
Orange ON
No critical alarms are present, and system is in service. There are one or more major alarms present.
Flashing LED test (Note1) SI card is initialization. (Note2) MN
Yellow
OFF
No major alarms.
ON
There are one or more minor alarms present.
Flashing LED test (Note1) SI card is initialization. (Note2) OFF
No Minor alarms. (Warning and Indeterminate alarms won’t turn the LED on)
Note1: After the LED test button is pushed, all LED's except all cards’ PWR LED and FE interfaces’ small link LED as well as SC card CF LED will be flashing for 5 sec. Note2: During the NE cold or warm reboot period, there are two steps.
• First step: SI – E card initialization; all three LED's are OFF • Second step: After that, all three LED's are flashing with 1 second frequency. Stop flashing of those three LED's is regarded as the finish point of the rebooting. Before whole system (all cards) isn't up, the alarm status reported by each card will not be reflected by the Critical/Major/Minor LED's.
8
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Input Power Monitoring
WORKING
PROTECTING
RETURN/RED -48V/BLUE
RETURN/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
RETURN/RED -48V/BLUE
Power(A)
Power(A)
RETURN/ORANGE -48V/BLACK
Power(B)
Power Monitoring LEDs
Fig. 4 Input Power Monitoring
Label
Color
Status
Description
ON Critical (CR)
Major (MJ)
RED
ORANGE
Minor (MI)
YELLOW
One or more critical non – communication alarms are present One or more critical communication alarms are present. LED test (Note 1). SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).
FLASHING OFF
No Critical alarms are present and the system is in service
ON
There are one or more major alarms present LED test (Note 1). SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).
FLASHING OFF
No major alarms
ON
There are one or minor alarms present
FLASHING
LED test (Note 1). SI card is inizialitation process (Note2).
OF PWR CR LED ACO TEST
DEGUG
MJ
MN
FAULT
No minor alarms (Warning and Indeterminate alarms won’t turn the LED on )
T3-1
SUP
T4-1 T3-2
MGT-1
ALM T4-2
EXT-1
MGT-2
HCOC2 HCOC1
EXT-3
EXT-2
EXT-4
EOW
MDO1-4
MDI1-4
MDO5-8
MDI5-8
F1-1 F1-2
Fig. 5 Alarm LED's on SI-E Card
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Maintenance
1.3.3
Common LED indications on modules
To assist in maintenance, there are some LEDs on the front of some of the modules. Not all cards have all of the following LEDs. Refer to the table below indicating which cards have which LEDs. PWD LED: A Green "PWD" LED indicates the card is powered. "PWD" LED off indicates that there is not Power available due to a broken power converter, external power cable or connector. FAULT LED: A red “FAULT” LED indicates one or more alarms are present or the card is booting. TIP The "FAULT" LED will also be lit on a traffic card if a SFP is not inserted or there is no signal received. ACT LED: A green "ACT" LED shows the EPG state. When NE is rebooting, the state of this LED will be kept. For HOCC cards, this LED will be on when there is only one HOCC card because the EPG of HOCC always exists. LINK LED: The green "Link" LED state on SDH interface is related to LOS. The Link LED state on GE interface is related to link status. Warm reboot will not affect the state of Link LED.
10
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
LEDs Card
ACT
SC
PWR
X
FAULT
CF
LINK
CR
MJ
MN
X
X
SI
X
X
X X
X
X
SI – E
X
X
X
X
X
HOCC
X
X
X
LOCC
X
X
X
2 x STM-64
X
X
X
8 x STM-16
X
X
X
8 x STM-4/1
X
X
X
X
X
8 x STM-1e (W/P)
X
8 x STM-1e (I/O)
X
12 x E3/DS3 (W/P)
X
X
12 x E3/DS3 (I/O)
X
X
126 x E1 (W/P)
X
X
X
126 x E1 (I/O)
X
1 x 10GE/T
X
X
X
8 x GE/T
X
X
X
6 x GE + 4 x FEGE/A
X
X
X
2 x GE + 12 x FE/RPR
X
X
X
POA
X
X
X
BOA
X
X
X
Fig. 6 Common LED's indications on modules
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Maintenance
1.3.4
Alarm display on LCT
Active Alarm List A detailed listing of all alarms, recorded since the operating terminal began monitoring alarms, can be found by selecting from "Chassis View" main menu: Fault Æ Active Alarms. The list contains all alarms which are not acknowledged independently of its Cleared Status. The possible cleared statuses are:
• Cleared: alarm cleared event received for that alarm from NE. This event is time stamped on the alarm details.
• Not Cleared: no alarm cleared event received yet for that alarm from NE • Cleared Manually: alarm cleared manually by the operator. After synchronizing
the NE, or login out and in again, the alarm will show up once more in a new entry as Not Cleared. The line with "Cleared Manually" status will remain in the list.
There, three time stamps are given per alarm:
• alarm raise time • alarm clear time • time the alarm was acknowledged (the user that performed the command is also recorded)
Alarm Detail Window To have access to the detail of one alarm, please proceed with these steps: 1. Select an alarm from the alarm list. The background color will turn to grey 2. Click on the "Detail" button, a Description, Cause and Recommended Action for that alarm is displayed.
12
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Access to print the list in several file formats Help topics
Alarm filter
Get more details about one alarm
Fig. 7 Active Alarm list
1
2
Fig. 8 Alarm Detail window
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
13
Maintenance
To acknowledge an alarm: 1. Select the alarm entry in the "Active Alarm" list. 2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Acknowledge Alarm" from command list. The "Acknowledge Comments" window will open. 3. Write optionally some comment about the alarm into the comment field. 4. Click the "OK" button to confirm. TIP When an alarm with status "Cleared" or "Cleared Manually" is acknowledged, it automatically disappears from the LCT "Active Alarms" list and shows up in the LCT "History Alarms" list. Alarms with status "Not Cleared" will remain in the "Active Alarms" list even if they are acknowledged.
LCT History Alarms list In the History Alarm list one can find alarms which are
• cleared or • have been cleared manually and • are acknowledged Only alarm entries in the LCT History Alarms list can be deleted. To delete an alarm: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Æ History Alarms. The "History Alarm" window will open. 2. Select the alarm you want to delete from list. 3. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Delete Alarm" from command list. A "Confirmation" window will pop up. 4. Click the "Yes" button to confirm. The alarm will be removed from the alarm list.
14
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
2 1
3 4
Fig. 9 Alarm Acknowledgement
1
3 2
4
Fig. 10 History Alarms List
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Maintenance
Filtered Alarm Display If you want to display Active Alarms or History Alarms for a specific card or port: 1. Select the object (card or port) in the "Chassis View" window. 2. With a click on the right mouse button open pop-up menu and select "Active Alarms" or "History Alarms" from command list. The corresponding alarm window will pop up and will display the active/history alarms for the selected object. 3. To remove the filter condition from the alarm list, press "Search". The "Alarm Search" window will pop up. 4. Search parameters are set to defaults. Press "OK" in the "Alarm Search" window. The filter condition will be removed and all active / history alarms on the NE will be displayed. Alarms filtered by severity and/or category Alarms sorted on an alarm severity and/or category criteria can be obtained by clicking over the number indicating the quantity of alarms at the lower section of the GUI as shown in Fig. 12
16
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
3
1 4 2
Fig. 11 Filtered Alarm Display
Double click
Fig. 12 Alarms filtered by severity and/or category
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Maintenance
1.3.5
Event Information in LCT
Besides the Alarms lists, it could be important for the maintenance tasks to know about the exact moment there were changes in the system status. The events logged are:
• System Level Events (access, reboot, MIB, etc) • Card Level Events (state, error report, etc) • Port Level Event (port state, SFP state, port operation mode) • Equipment Protection Events • Traffic Protection Events • Synchronization Events • DCN Events • Ethernet Events The TNMS – M LCT time stamps every event and logs it in a file. The Events listed in the log file detail the time and date the event occurred, the event's name, type, and a short description. The event about the communication between NE and LCT is recorded in LCT rather than getting it from NE. To open the Events list: 1. In the chassis Main Menu select Fault Æ Events The Events list windows opens TIP This is only an information window; there are not configuration options available
18
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
Fig. 13 Events List
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Maintenance
1.4 1.4.1
Changes on the Default Alarm Configuration Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
To control the RS – LOF, TU – LOM and TU – LOP reporting: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Fault Æ Alarm Rule Switch Configuration 2. Set the LOF Monitoring Switch parameter from drop-down list to: "Enable" to set to non – monitoring. "Disable" to set to monitoring. 3. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to activate the changes.
20
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
RS – LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Switch Configuration
When disable, RS-LOF alarms are reported!
Fig. 14 RS-LOF reporting controlled by Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
1
1 2
1 3
Fig. 15 Alarm Rule Switch Configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Maintenance
1.4.2
AIS and RDI alarms configuration
It is possible to enable or disable the AIS/RDI alarms for the complete network element or for particular termination points. The default configuration is AIS and RDI alarms disabled for the complete network element. This is done so in order to minimize the amount of alarm entries in the Alarms lists in case of a failure, taking in consideration that AIS/RDI alarms are "secondary" alarms. In the majority of the cases it might be enough to see only the primary alarms to carry out the troubleshooting. Changes made in this window have an immediate effect over the alarm list To see current settings in the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window: 1. In the main menu click over Fault Æ AIS/RDI Alarms Configuration 2. Once the AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration window opens, press the "Query" button to see the termination points and the current configuration 3. An "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment 4. After the termination points (TPs) are shown, select the TPs where the AIS/RDI alarms should be enabled. This can be done for the complete network element, for a complete card or for individual TPs (MS, AU-4). By default all the points are disabled (checkpoints not selected). The activation can be done for a particular TP, for a complete card or for the complete NE. 5. Click on "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes real. 6. At the first AIS alarm enabling, a confirmation dialog box will be presented informing that the AIS alarm will be enabled for the element. 7. Click on "Yes" button. 8. Another "Information" box will show up asking to wait for a moment until the changed data are uploaded. 9. The updated AIS/RDI Enabled Configuration window will be presented. WARNING Even when the secondary alarms (AIS/RDI) are disabled, they will not show up as "Disable" in the Alarm Type List.
22
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
3
2 Fig. 16 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration I
4 9
5
6
7 8
Fig. 17 AIS/RDI Alarm Enabled Configuration II
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
23
Maintenance
1.4.3
Alarm inhibit configuration
For those cards or ports which are currently not used, it is possible to mask their alarms completely. This is done through the Alarm Inhibit Configuration window. The changes made in this window have an immediate effect, that is, if a card/port with active alarms is inhibited all the alarms go immediately to the Cleared status (green background color in the Active Alarms list). If the card/port was in the inhibit state and it is configured to Non-Inhibit, then if there were active alarms affecting that card/port, they would go to the Not Cleared status. WARNING The default configuration after the commissioning procedure is the complete network element alarms inhibited. The Active Alarm list will not show any alarm. In order to change the alarm inhibit configuration: 1. In the "Chassis View" main menu, select Fault Æ Alarm Inhibit Configuration 2. The "Alarms Inhibit Configuration" window opens. There you can see the settings for the complete NE, particular cards or ports. If the corresponding check point is set, then the relevant alarms for that particular object are inhibited. The plus sign shows the child objects for the parent object besides (e.g. the ports for a particular card are the child objects and the card the parent). WARNING If the alarms are inhibited for a particular child object (e.g. port) the parent object check point (e.g. card) will not show this condition. You have to click the plus sign to find out if the alarms are inhibited there. 3. Set the check point for the card/port where the alarms should be inhibited/non inhibited 4. Click the "OK" or "Apply" button to make the changes real 5. In the information dialog box that shows up, click the OK button to finish.
24
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1 2
3
5 4
Fig. 18 Alarm Inhibit Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Maintenance
1.4.4
Alarm type list management
The Alarm Severity for every alarm within each network element can be modified based on the alarm type. Also the reporting of alarms can be enabled and disabled based on the alarm type. WARNING Disabling any alarm will only apply to new alarms and not to current alarms. If an active alarm is disabled, it will remain in the Active Alarm list, but if a new failure leads to an alarm of the same type, this one will not be reported. The same happens with Alarm Severity. To open the "Alarm Type List Management" window in order to modify the severity and the alarm reporting status: 1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Æ Alarm Type List Management 2. Selected a particular alarm (the background color becomes blue). 3. With a click on the right mouse button on the "User Defined Severity" column open pop-up menu and select the alarm severity. 4. With a click on the right mouse button on the "Report Status" column enable or disable alarm reporting for the selected alarm type. 5. To make the changes real and close this window, click the "OK or Apply" button. An "Information" window will pop up. 6. Click the "Yes" button to confirm.
26
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
3
2
6
4 5 1
Fig. 19 Alarm Type List Management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
Maintenance
1.4.5
Alarm Persistency Time Configuration
In particular failure scenarios, the alarm persistency is very short. Commonly these alarms are known as intermittent alarms. The intermittent alarms will fill the alarms logs (Active Alarms, History Alarms) in a very short period of time. To avoid the logs filling with intermittent alarms, the persistency time can be configured in hiT 7080. The Alarm Detection Persistent Time represents the minimum time the alarm has to be present before it is reported in the Alarms List (by default the value is 2 seconds). The Alarm Clearing Persistent Time represents the minimum time the alarm has to remain in the cleared status before being cleared in the Alarms List (default value, 10 seconds). In order to change the persistency times, 1. In the "Chassis View" main menu select Fault Æ Alarm Persistent Time Configuration 2. Change the "Alarm Detection Persistent Time" and "Alarm Clearing Persistent Time" accordingly 3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up. 4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
28
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
2 3
3 4
Fig. 20 Changing Alarm Persistent Time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Maintenance
1.4.6
Event Log Configuration
The operator can define the Event Log Policy. The Event Log policy is executed when the number of the stored events in the event log file reaches the maximum. To define the Event Log Policy: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Fault Æ Event Log Configuration 2. Select the size of stack for logs. The minimal size could be selected is 500 and the maximal size could be selected is 5000. Enter the event log storage policy from the drop-down list: FIFO: if there are new incoming events, the newest events will be stored while the oldest ones will be discarded. rejectNewEvent: any new incoming event will be rejected. 3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up. 4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
30
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
2 1
3 4
Fig. 21 Event Log Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Maintenance
1.4.7
Alarm Out Configuration
On the front plate of the hiT 7080 SI-E card there are three LEDs intended to indicate summarized alarm conditions. The red LED indicates critical alarms, the orange LED indicates mayor alarms and the yellow one minor alarms. The warning severity is not shown. For rack alarm indications, the systems use the ALM connector on the SI-E card. Through this connector the SI-E can drive subrack alarm information to an external alarm card that summarizes the rack alarms. The external alarm card has an "urgent" and a "non urgent" alarm indication. The alarm LEDs on the SI-E and in the external alarm card can be affected pressing the push buttons on the NEs (Suppress and Alarm Cut Off) or using LCT menu. "Alarm out suppress" performs a temporarily alarm cutoff of this alarms. It has the same effects as pressing the suppress button on the NE. If new alarms go to the raised status, the LEDs are going to be lit again. The other 3 field are related with the external alarm panel. "Alarm Out Cuttoff" performs a permanently alarm cutoff for the alarms going to the external alarm panel. "Enable CR / MJ Alarm Out" and "Enable Minor Alarm Out" are also used in order to enable or disable alarms on the external alarm panel. In order to access the "Alarm Out Configuration" window: 1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Configuration ÆAlarm Out Configuration 2. Select the desired action; e.g. "Alarm Out Suppress". 3. Click the "Apply" button to finish. An "Information" window will pop up. 4. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
32
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
2
1 3
4
Fig. 22 Alarm Out Configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Maintenance
1.4.8
MDI / MDO Configuration
SURPASS hiT 7080 provides two RJ 45 ports for eight MDI (Miscellaneous Discrete Input) interfaces and two RJ 45 ports for eight MDO (Miscellaneous Discrete Output) interfaces. These connectors are placed on the front plate of the SI – E card.
• MDI is used to read the status of external alarms. • MDO is used to drive external devices. The specification for the electrical contacts can be found in the Technical Description of the hiT 7080. In order to access the "MDI / MDO Alarm Configuration" window: 1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select Configuration Æ MDI/MDO Alarm Configuration 2. Select the "MDI" tab to configure the inputs 3. For each MDI you can configure the following parameters: Label: Enter free text to help identify different MDIs. Status: Select from the drop-down list to enable or disable the MDI status. 4. Click the "Apply" button to make your changes permanent. An "Information" window will pop up. 5. Click the "OK" button to confirm. 6. Select the "MDO" tab to configure the outputs 7. Select the MDO from the drop-down list and the corresponding alarms of this MDO port will be displayed in the "Already Associated Alarm List" pane. 8. Select from the drop-down list to "Enable" or "Disable" the MDO status. 9. Click on the "arrow" buttons to move the selected alarms from the "Unassociated Alarm List" pane to the "Already Associated Alarm List" pane and vice versa. 10. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your changes permanent. An "Information" window will pop up. 11. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
34
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
2
1
Fig. 23 Open MDI/MDO Configuration window
7
8
6 3 2
2 9
4 2
10 2
5
11
Fig. 24 MDI/MDO configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
35
Maintenance
1.4.9
Port Monitoring Configuration
It is possible to change the port monitoring configuration for each SDH port in the hiT 7080 equipment.
• Auto – Mode: The default configuration for the ports is Auto Mode, it means, the
system will not monitor the port as long as there is no valid signal detected on RX.
• Monitor Mode: From that point on, when a valid input signal is detected for the first time, the port mode changes to Monitoring. This enables alarm reporting.
• Non – monitor Mode: Is it also possible to configure the port mode to Non – monitor. In that case the alarms will never be reported for that port.
TIP The configuration changes are immediately applied in the "Active Alarms" list. Changing the port mode for a particular port to Monitor/Non-monitor modifies immediately the cleared status for the alarms affecting that port (considering the persistency time). In order to access the "SDH Port Property Configuration" window: 1. Right mouse click over the relevant SDH port. 2. In the pop-up menu select "SDH Port Configuration". 3. In the "Port Property Configuration" window the "Port Mode" can be changed. 4. Click the "Apply or Ok" button to make your change permanent.
36
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
3
1
2
5 4
Fig. 25 SDH port monitoring mode configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Maintenance
1.4.10
Termination point monitoring configuration
It is possible to change the termination point (TP) monitoring configuration for:
• RS TTP Æ on SDH ports, RSOH. • MS TTP Æ on SDH ports, MSOH. • VC4 CTP (NIM: Non Intrusive Monitoring) Æ when VC4 is not structured, read only access to the POH.
WARNING The default configuration for TP Alarm Mon on all the termination points (TP) is "Non-Monitored", it means, the Active Alarm list will not show alarms related with those TP. In order to see alarms related to a particular TP, it is necessary configure the parameter "TP Alarm Mon" to "Monitored". To access the point 1. From the "Chassis View" Main Menu, select Configuration Æ TP Configuration 2. In the "TP Configuration" window select the relevant card and port 3. Click the Query button to get the list of TPs for that card and port 4. Select the Termination Point where the change should be made (the background color changes to blue) 5. Modify TP Alarm Mon, the options are Monitored / Non-monitored 6. Click the Apply button to make your changes permanent. An "Information" window will pop up. 7. Click the "OK" button to confirm.
38
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
2 1
3
Fig. 26 Open TP Configuration window
5 RS TTP
4
VC4 TTP M S TTP
VC12 TTP
6
Fig. 27 TP Configuration
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
39
Maintenance
40
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
2
Basic Troubleshooting TxDeg auLOP SD SSF AIS
TxFail
TS_T3 FERF
MIS-SL
LOS UNEQ
Fig. 28
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
41
Maintenance
2.1
SDH alarm scheme
Large numbers of alarm and error messages are an integral part of SDH networks. In SDH, these are referred to as defects and anomalies, respectively. They are coupled to network sections and the corresponding overhead information. The advantage of this detailed information is illustrated as follows: Complete failure of a circuit results, e.g. in a LOS alarm (loss of signal) in the receiving network element. This alarm triggers a complete chain of subsequent messages in the form of AIS (alarm indication signals). The transmitting side is informed of the failure by the return of an RDI alarm (remote defect indication). The alarm messages are transmitted in fixed bytes in the SOH or POH. For example, byte G1 is used for the HP-RDI alarm.
42
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
STM-N Alarm Scheme High Order Path Multiplex Section Regenerator Section
Regenerator Section K2
MS RDI HP RDI
AIS
MS-AIS
LOS/LOF
AIS
MS RDI HP RDI
K2 MS BIP
BIP Err.
G1 MS REI
B1
B2 HP BIP
M1
HP REI
B3
G1
SDH Multiplexer
SDH Regenerator
SDH Multiplexer
Fig. 29 Sections in a SDH network
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
Maintenance
With the help of the overhead data bytes, we can send forward and backward from the reporting network element certain alarm conditions. This information helps to localize the fault as quickly as possible. Using a process of prioritization, and elimination, we can determine where the fault is, what is possibly causing it and what needs to be done to fix it. The following diagram attempts to show the Alarms raised, their subsequent actions, destinations in the forward and backward directions. The following description should help to read the diagram:
• (J0), (C2), (H4) etc are bytes to be found in the RSOH, MSOH, POH High and low order.
• The line shows the direction the Alarm is sent, with a description of the alarm event for example Loss of Signal, or Loss of frame.
• The following show all the alarms that cause the forwarding onwards or backwards of the next alarm indication as required.
• The alarm names indicate the alarms that all cause the subsequent alarm
indication and the "1" indicates the contents of the STM frame contains all "1"s in the AU-4.
LOS/LOF
Detected and Raised (Object, where the alarm is generated.) Generation and Sent Fig. 30 Symbol description
44
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Fig. 31 SDH maintenance interactions
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .
45
Maintenance
2.2
Optical safety management
All versions of optical interfaces include ALS circuits (Automatic Laser Shutdown), which are activated whenever the optical carrier fails, in accordance with ITU-T Recommendation G.958 and IEC standard 825 Appendix 2. In the presence of a LOS (Loss-of-signal) alarm the Laser is automatically switched OFF leaving the optical connection in ALS status. The laser can recover automatically or can be manually triggered (manual restart). In case of automatic recovery the system generates a trigger pulse every 90s ±10 sec. If the condition that generated the failure (LOS) overcomes, a valid signal is provided on the RX interface, the connection is immediately recovered. The specific equipment configuration allows the possibility to enable/disable the automatic laser shutdown (enabled by default), according to the EM settings. In order to change the ALS configuration: 1. Right mouse click on the selected SDH port. 2. Select "SDH Port Configuration" from pop-up menu. 3. Perform the required settings 4. Press the "Apply or Ok" button to make the changes permanent. WARNING Port Admin Mode "Disabled" will shut the laser down for the complete port.
5
1
2
S
R
Tx
Rx LSOFF LSOFF
Rx
R
S
4
3
Tx
1
Optical carrier break
4
Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm
2
Loss-off-signal (LOS) alarm
5
Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)
3
Automatic Laser Shut-down (ALS)
Fig. 32 Automatic Laser Shutdown Mechanism
46
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Port admin mode: Enable Æ Laser on Disable Æ Laser off
1
3 2
2
Laser restart: Manual restart:short pulse Manual test: long pulse
4 2
Fig. 33 Optical Safety management
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
Maintenance
2.3
Reboot and shutdown
2.3.1
Software initiated
By selecting from "Chassis View" main menu Configuration Æ NE from the main menu there are 3 choices to reboot or shutdown the network element. These are:
• Warm Reboot. Warm reboot will perform a network element software reload. This
option is not traffic effecting. System warm reboot process takes up to 18 minutes. It is suggested that no operations (such as card insertion or pull out, system power on or power off) be performed during system reboot.
• Cold Reboot. Cold will perform both a software reboot as well as a hardware
reboot. System cold rebooting (system initialization) takes up to 19 minutes to complete. It is suggested that no other operations (such as card insertion or pullout, system power-on or power-off) be performed during the system initialization. System cold reboot will cause traffic hit. The traffic hit time is about 2 – 3 minutes when traffic cards are rebooted.
• Shutdown NE. This will perform a software shutdown of the system controller
card. This option is designed if you wish to perform a controlled shutdown of the network element prior to switching off the power. This is not traffic effecting but it does stop all management communications (CLI, TNMS-CT LCT, TNMS – C).
TIP Messages will show up informing about the consequences for the selected command and asking for confirmation.
2.3.2
Hardware Initiated
There is a push button on the front of the SC card. For security reasons a small object such as a pencil is required to push the button. This will perform a warm reboot of the network element. This reboot is not traffic effecting.
2.3.3
Card Cold / Warm Reboot
On all traffic cards there is an option to perform a cold/warm reboot. Cold reboot will stop all hardware functions and will reload the software from the system controller. Lasers will be shut down during Cold Reboot. Traffic running on this card will be interrupted. The card reboot time is 2 – 3 minutes. Warm reboot restarts the card SW. Lasers stay turned on. Traffic is not interrupted. To access the Cold/Warm Reboot options for a card, right click over the card and select "Cold Reboot Card" or "Warm Reboot Card" from the pop up menu. TIP Messages will show up for the selected command and asking for confirmation.
48
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Software reebot.Not traffic effecting Hardware &Software reebot. Traffic effecting
System controller shut down, causes the NE go to offline and will no be managed anymore by TNMS. After shut down, the power supply should be disconnected
Fig. 34 Reboot Options
Software reebot only. Not traffic effecting
Hardware & Software reebot. Traffic effecting
Fig. 35 Cold/Warm Reboot a Traffic Card
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
49
Maintenance
2.4 2.4.1
Test management Loopback test management
The SURPASS hiT 7080 support path and port loopbacks. Path loopbacks where already discussed in the cross-connection chapter. Nevertheless we can note here that as path loopbacks are created on the crossconnection matrix, they always send the input signal to the matrix towards the out direction. They can be created on VC4, VC3 and VC12 level. Port loopbacks are created on the interface card itself. The hiT 7080 supports "Port Loopback" for SDH cards. Two types of loopback can be performed:
• Inward Loopback • Outward Loopback Inward Loopback The Tx signal from the HOCC card will be looped on the SDH port and is sent back towards the HOCC card.
Outward Loopback The incoming line Rx signal will be looped back to the Tx port and transmitted onto the line again.
50
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Loopbacks for Test Outward loopback Cross Connection Card
Phy. Port
STM-N
Inward loopback Cross Connection Card
Phy. Port
STM-N
Fig. 36 Loopbacks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Maintenance
Configuring Port Loopbacks To start a loopback test: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Æ Loopback Test Management. 2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and "Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports. 3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be configured 4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will open. 5. Select the types of loopback required, either "Inward Loopback" or "Outward Loopback". 6. Click the "Begin" button. A "Confirmation" window will pop-up. 7. Click "Yes" to confirm. 8. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window when finished. To stop a loopback test: 1. From "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Æ Loopback Test Management. 2. In the "Loopback Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and "Loopback Type" to filter the list of available ports. 3. Select the desired port where the loopback should be stopped 4. Click the "Modify" button. The "Loopback Test Configuration" window will open. 5. Click the "Stop" button. 6. The "Loopback State" information will change to reflect the modification. Press the "Close" button to return to the "Loopback Test Management" window when finished.
WARNING STM-N Port Loopbacks, loop back the whole STM frame (Payload and Overheads) so care should be taken to make sure communications are maintained.
52
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1 2 1
3 4 5 1 6
7 8
Fig. 37 Start a Loopback
1
2 1
3 4
6
5
Fig. 38 Stop a Loopback
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
53
Maintenance
2.4.2
AIS / RDI Insertion Test Management
Configuration of Forced AIS/RDI 1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Æ AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management. 2. In the "AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management" window select the desired "Card" and "Port". 3. Click the "Query" button to filter. 4. An information window pops-up while the necessary information is retrieved from the NE. 5. Select the Termination Point where the AIS/RDI is going to be inserted. 6. Click the "Set" button. The "AIS / RDI Insertion Test Set" window will open. 7. Click the radio button to select the "Insertion Test Type" required for your test. Available options are:
• Normal: No insertion test will be implemented. • In Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards cross – connection direction. • Out Forced-AIS: AIS will be inserted towards Tx port. • In Forced – AIS and Out Forced – AIS: AIS will be inserted both towards crossconnection direction and Tx port.
• Out Forced – RDI: RDI will be inserted towards Tx port. 8. Click the "OK" button to start the test. 9. An "Information" dialog box will confirm the action. Press the "OK" button to proceed. TIP To stop a forced AIS / RDI select the "Normal" option in the "AIS / RDI Insertion Test Set" window.
54
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
2
4
3
Fig. 39 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Management
5
7 9 8
6
Fig. 40 AIS/RDI Insertion Test Set
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
55
Maintenance
2.4.3
LED Test
LED test is used to check if the LEDs of an NE are working correctly. 1. From the "Chassis View" main menu select: Maintenance Æ LED Test to launch the LED test dialog. 2. Click the "Test LED" button to start the test. If the LEDs on this NE work properly, they will flash for a few seconds and then turn to their normal state. An "Information" window will pop-up, when the test has finished. 3. Click the "OK" button to confirm. NOTE LCT user will not receive any feedback if LED test was successful or not. Visual inspection of the LEDs directly at the NE has to be done.
56
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
1
2
3
Fig. 41 LED Test
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
Maintenance
2.5
Basic fault clearance
Basic options for alarm containment and alarm evaluation Cables and Connectors
• Check the electrical connectors to ensure that they are fully engaged and that none of the pins is distorted.
• Check the optical fibers and optical connectors in accordance with the instructions given in Trouble Shooting Manual.
• Check the cable layout (copper and optical fiber) in accordance with the wiring diagram.
58
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
Basic Fault Clearance Alarm
LEDs on the front panels of the Cards ( also visible on LCT)
Detailed identification of the alarm on the LCT GUI
Referring to the Recommended actions in: Alarm detail window Troubleshooting Manual Fig. 42 Basic fault clearance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
Maintenance
60
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Maintenance
3
Site Maintenance
UX X -M X MU XL-
UX T- M
X - MU XXL
12 U-5 CP 12 U-5 CP R DO
E
DT
X -MU
X MU PT -
UX SI-M
Fig. 43
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
61
Maintenance
3.1
General card replacement procedures
Before replacing a module which is suspected of being defective, try to reactivate the system by means of a hardware reset (e. g. pulling and re-inserting the module), but do not do this if the red fault LED on the module is illuminated. WARNING When replacing modules, you must comply with the safety regulation and the module replacement procedure, as described in Trouble Shooting Manual. When replacing a module, it is essential to check and record the optical and the electrical transmitting power, using an optical or electrical power meter respectively, before the modules are returned to service. The module setup procedure can only start once the module has been correctly inserted into the slot, as far as the stop, and then locked. Modules can be removed from or plugged into the slots while they are live. Special Card replacement procedures apply for the SC card. They are described in the Troubleshooting Manual. Strictly follow these procedures when you have to change a SC card. For the HOCC card also special replacement procedures exist. They are also described in the Troubleshooting Manual. To change a Fan or Filter Unit follow procedures as described in the Troubleshooting Manual and in the Installation and Test Manual. Running system without HOCC card is abnormal operation, which should be prohibited.
62
FT52427EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Contents 1
Abbreviations
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
1
Abbreviations
2
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
1
Abbreviations
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
3
Abbreviations
A AB8FE
Adapter Box 8 FE
Abbr.
Abbreviation
AC
Alternating Current
ACM
Acquisition Mode
ACO
Alarm Cut Off
ADMX
Add Drop Multiplexer
AFI
Authority and Format Indicator
AGW
Access GateWay
AI_TSF
Adapted Information TSF
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal (G.782) (G.783)
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown (G.783)
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
APS
1) Application Program System 2) Automatic Protection Switching
ARP
Address Resolution Protocol
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange
ASE
Amplified Spontaneous Emission
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation number 1
ASON
Automatic Switched Optical Network
ASTN
Automatic Switched Transport Network
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
AU
Administrative Unit (G.782) (G.783)
AU-4
Administrative unit, level 4
AUG
Administrative Unit Group
AUX
Auxiliary Channel
B
4
B3ZS
Binary 3 Zero Suppression (Code)
BASW
Basic Application Software
BBE
Background Block Error
BBER
Background Block Error Ratio FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
BER
Bit Error Ratio
BIP
Bit Interleaved Parity
BP
Boot Prom
BPDU
Bridge Protocol Data Unit
BPL
Back-plane
BPS
Boot Program System
BRAS
Broadband Remote Access Server
BSHR
Bi-directional Self Healing Ring
BSHR-2
2-Fiber Bi-directional Self Healing Ring
BSHR-4
4-Fiber Bi-directional Self-Healing Ring
BTB
Bus Termination Board
Bw7R
Style 7R
C CAN
Control Area Network (internal bus system)
CANEX
External CAN bus interface
CC
Compact Core
CC
Cross-Connect, Cross-Connection
CC_CH
Main Controller Card for Compact Core
CC_TX
Matrix and Timing Card for Compact Core
CCITT
Comité Consultative International Télégraphique et Téléphonique
CCM
Card Controller Module
CCU
Card Clock Unit
CDR
Clock and Data Recovery
CD-ROM
Compact Disc Read Only Memory
CE
Communauté Européenne
CEC
Control Extension Cable for hiT 7050 CC_ES
CES
Ethernet Based Interface for Communication with Extension Shelf
CF
Card Fail
cHEC
Core Header Error Correction
CIR
Committed Information Rate
CI_SSF
Characteristic Information SSF
CISC
Complex Instruction Set Computer
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
5
Abbreviations
CIST
Common and Internal Spanning Tree
CLNS
Connectionless Mode Network Service
CLU
Clock Unit
CM
Connection Matrix
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
CMIP
Common Management Information Protocol (G.784)
CMISE
Common Management Information Service Element (G.783) (G.784)
CML
Common Mode Logic
CMS
Ethernet Based Interface for Communication with Main Shelf
C-n
Container (G.708)
COPA
Connector Panel
CoS
Class of Service
CP
1) Connection Point 2) Card Protection
CPE
Customer Premises Equipment
CPI
Card Present Interface
CPS
Card Program System
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
CRS
Card Release Switching
CSMA/CD
Carrier Sense Multiple Access/Collision Detection
CST
1) Common Spanning Tree 2) Central Standard Time
CT
Craft Terminal
CTP
Connection Termination Point
Ctrl
Control
CUG
Closed User Group
CWDM
Course Wavelength Division Multiplexing
D
6
D1-D12
Data Communication Channel, defined in the SOH of a STM - 1
DA
Destination Address
DART
Digital Audio Reconstruction Technology
dB
Decibel
DC
Direct Current
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
DC
Double Core (Double-Row Subrack)
DCC
Data Communication Channel (G.708/782/783/784)
DCCA
Data Communication Channel Access
DCCB
Data Communication Channel Bus
DCCM
DCC Bytes D4 to D12 (multiplex section)
DCCR
DCC Bytes D1 to D3 (regenerator section)
DCM
Dispersion Compensation Module
DCN
Data Communication Network
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame
DEE
Data End Equipment
DEG
Signal Degraded (i.e. 10-8)
DEMUX
Demultiplexer
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DiffServ
Differentiated Services
DIN
Deutsche Industrienorm
DIS
Disable
D-lab
Distant laboratory
DLL
Dynamic Link Library
DM
Direction Mismatch
DNS
Domain Naming Service
DOC
DOH-Bus card layer
DOE
Electrical DOH-Bus layer
DOH
DCC/Overhead
DPT
Dynamic Packet Transport (CISCO)
DS
Defect Second
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
DSP
Domain Specific Part
D-SUB
Connector Type
DTC
Design To Cost (Optimization)
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTM
Design To Manufacturing (Optimization)
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTS
Design To Service (Optimization)
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
7
Abbreviations
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
8
E1
Engineering Orderwire channel (EOW)
E100-4
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports)
E100-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports)
E100S-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports), Supporting LCAS (hiT 7050 FP1)
E100SP-8
Electrical 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card protected (8 ports), Supporting LCAS (hiT 7050 CC)
E155-4
Electrical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (4 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
E155P-4
Electrical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card protected (4 ports) (hiT 7050 CC)
EB
Errored Block
EBC
Errored Block Counter
ECC
Embedded Communication Channel (G.784)
ECC (x)
Embedded Communications Channel, Layer x
EDC
Error Detection Code
EIA
Electronic Industry Association
ELAN
Extended LAN
EM
Element Manager (Software)
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EML
Element Management Layer
EmTRo
Embedded Transport Router
E&M
Exchange & Multiplex
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EOW
Engineering Order Wire (G.783)
EoS
Ethernet over SDH/Sonet
EOWC
Engineering Order Wire Conference
ERX
Edge Router
ES
1) Electrical Section 2) End System 3) Errored Second
ES-IS
End system to Intermediate System Protocol
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
ESCON
Enterprise System CONnection
ESD
1) Electrostatic Sensitive Device 2) Electrostatic Discharge
ESM
Extension Shelf MicroShelf
ESM-CORE MicroShelf Core Card ESRT
Equipment and Software Release Table
ETH
Ethernet
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standards Institute
EXC
Excessive bit error rate
EXER-R(E)
Exercise, Ring for East
EXER-R(W) Exercise, Ring for West EXER-S(E)
Exercise, Span for East
EXER-S(W) Exercise, Span for West
F F
Standardized Interface for the connection to a local control station
F1
User channel, defined in the SOH of a STM-1
F2
Path user channel, defined in the POH of VC-3/VC-4
FCAPS
Fault-, Configuration-, Accounting-, Performance- and Security Management
FCC
Fan Unit for hiT 7050 CC
FCPC
Connector Type
FCS
Frame Check Sequence
FE
Fast Ethernet
FEDP
Fast Ethernet Distributor Panel
FE Link Down
Far End Link Down (Ethernet Alarm)
FEC
1) Forward Error Correction 2) Forwarding Equivalence Class (MPLS)
FFP1
Fan Unit for hiT 7050 FP1
FICON
Fiber Connection
FM
Fault Management
FO
Fiber Optic
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
9
Abbreviations
FOP
Failure of Protocol
FOT
Fail of topology
FOX
Forty Gigabit MUX
FP
Fabry-Perot
FP1
FlatPack 1
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
FR
1) Frame Relay 2) Fault Report
FR4 FRU
Field Replaceable Unit
FS
Forced Switch
FS-P
Forced Switch to Protection
FSP
Fiber Service Platform
FS-R(E)
Forced Switch to Protection, Ring for East
FS-R(W)
Forced Switch to Protection, Ring for West
FS-S(E)
Forced Switch to Protection, Span for East
FS-S(W)
Forced Switch to Protection, Span for West
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
FTZ
Deutsche Telekom, Forschungs- und Technologiezentrum
FW
Firmware
G
10
GARP
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol
GBIC
GigaBit Ethernet Converter
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
GFP-F
Generic Framing Procedure - Framed Mode
GFP-T
Generic Framing Procedure - Tansparent Mode
GMRP
GARP Multicast Registration Protocol
GMT
Greenwich Mean Time
GND
Ground
GNE
Gateway Network Element
GPRS
General Packet Radio Service
GPS
Global Positioning System
GRE
Generic Routing Encapsulation
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
GTP
Group Termination Point (of concatenated signals)
GUI
Graphical User Interface
GUIMN
Graphical User Interface Manual
GVRP
GARP VLAN registration protocol
H HBT
High Bandwidth Tributary
HCOC
High Capacity Overhead Channel
HDB3
High Density Bipolar Code third order
HDLC
High-Level Data Link Control
HEC
Header Error Control
HEL
History Event Log
HFC
Hybrid Fiber / Coax
HO
High Order (SDH Traffic)
HPC
Higher Order Path Connection (G.782) (G.783)
HPOM
Higher Order Path Monitoring
HRL
1) Connector Type 2) High Return Loss
HS
Handset
HTML
Hypertext Mark-up Language
HTTP
Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HW
Hardware
I ICOM
Internal Communication Infrastructure (in MSI Core)
ID
Identifier, Identification
IDI
Initial Domain Identifier
IDP
Initial Domain Part
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineering
I/O
Input/Output
IF
1) Interface 2) In Frame state
IF2M
Electrical E1 Interface Card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
11
Abbreviations
IF345M
Electrical E3/DS3 Interface Card, 3 x 34/45 Mbit/s
IF4FE4GE
FE/GbE Board, 4 x FE el., 4 x GbE opt.
IF7FE2GEL2 L2 Switch Board, 7 x FE el., 2 x GbE opt., IFO155M
Interface 8 (Octal) x 155 Bit/s
IFO155M-E
Electrical STM-1 Card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s
IFOFE
Optical Octal 100BaseFX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports) VC4/VC-3
IFOFE-E
Electrical Octal 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports) VC-4/VC-3
IFOFES-E
Electrical Octal 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet Interface Card (8 ports) VC-3/VC-12
IFQ2G5(B)
Optical STM-16 Card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s
IFQ622M
Optical STM-4 Card, Quad 622 Mbit/s
IFQGBE
Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card (4 ports)
IFQGBEB
Interface Quad. GBE Optical, VLAN Concentrator option
IFQGBE-E
Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card
IFQGBEB-E Interface Quad. GBE Electrical, VLAN Concentrator option IFS10G(B)
Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s
IFS10G-M
Optical STM-64/OTU2 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s for Metro WDM
IFS10G-R
Optical STM-64/OTU2 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s for Regio WDM
IFS2G5
Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s
IFS2G5B
Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP
IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s IFSOA
Interface Single Optical Amplifier
IFSOA/PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier with dispersion compensation IFSOB
Optical Booster Card
IFSOB/PDC Optical Booster Card with dispersion compensation
12
IGMP
Internet Group Management Protocol
ILAN
Internal LAN
INT
Internal Alarm
IntServ
Integrated Services
IP
Interworking Protocol (G.784)
IP2OSI
IP to OSI
IS
Intermediate System (G.784) FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
IS-IS
Intermediate System to Intermediate System Protocol
ISDH-4
Internal SDH signal (622 Mb)
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISO
International Standards Organization (G.784)
ISP
Internet Service Provider
IST
Internal System Telegram
ITMN
Installation and Test Manual
ITU
International Telecommunication Union
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union – Transmission
J JE
Joint Engineering
JRE
Java Runtime Environment
K K1, K2
Automatic protection switching channel defined in the SOH of a STM-1,
L LACP
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (IEEE 802.3ad)
LAG
Link Aggregation Group
LAN
Local Area Network
LAPB
Link Access Procedure Balanced Mode
LAPD
Link Access Procedure on D channel
LAPS
Link Access Procedure over SDH (ITU-T X.86)
LASER
Light Amplification by Stimulated Emission Radiation
LBT
Low Bandwidth Tributary
LC
1) Lucent Connector 2) Link Connection
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT
Local Craft Terminal (Software)
LCX
Local Cross-connect
LDP
Label Distribution Protocol
LE
Signaling of line failure
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LLC1
Logical Link Control Type 1
LMB
Left Mouse Button
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
13
Abbreviations
LMP
Link Management Protocol
LNC
Local Node Clock
LNQ622M
PDH Extension Link Card
LO
1) Lock-out Protection 2) Low Order (SDH Traffic)
LOF
Loss of Frame (G.783)
LofDel
Loss of Frame Delineation (GFP Alarm)
LOM
Loss of Multiframe
LOP
Loss of Pointer
LOS
Loss of Signal (G.783)
LOW(R-E)
Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for East
LOW(R-EW) Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for East and West LOW(R-W)
Lockout of Working Channels - Ring Switch for West
LOW(S-E)
Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for East
LOW(S-EW) Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for East and West
14
LOW(S-W)
Lockout of Working Channels - Span Switch for West
LP
1) Logical Port (WAN Port) 2) Lockout of Protection
LP-S(E)
Lockout of Protection, Span for East
LP-S(W)
Lockout of Protection, Span for West
LPOM
Lower Order Path Monitoring
LSA
Connector Type
LSB
Line Switching board for IF345M 1+1 card protection
LSU
Line Switching Unit (Card) for 2 Mbit/s ports (hiT 7070)
LSU1
Line Switching Unit (Card) for 2 Mbit/s ports (hiT 7050 CC)
LSCP
Line Switch Card Protection
LSW64
Low-order Switch fabric (32x32 STM-1 equivalents for FP1)
LT
Line Termination
LTI
Loss of Timing Inputs
LTS
Loss Of Timing Signal
LTU
Line Termination Unit, Card which can be equipped in upper part of Subrack
LVDS
Low Voltage Differential Signals
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
Lx
Line slot x
LXC
Local Cross Connect
M MAC
Media Access Control (ISO/IEC 8802-3, ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3)
Major
Most priority alarm (urgent)
MAN
Metropolitan Area Network
MAU
Media Attachment Unit
MC
Matrix Connection
MCF
Message Communications Function (G.782/783/784)
MCU-B
Controller Unit B
MCUG
Multi CUG
MDI
Media Dependent Interface
MFNE
Multi-Function Network Element
MFP1
Main Board Drawer for FP1
MIB
Management Information Base
MINOR
Low priority alarm (non-urgent)
MIPS
Microprocessor without Interlocking Pipeline Stages
MMC
Multimedia Card (flash memory card)
MMF
Multimode Fiber
MP2MP
Multipoint to Multipoint
MPLS
Multi Protocol Label Switching
MS
Multiplex Section (G.783)
MSA
1) Multiplex Section Adaptation 2) Multi Source Agreement
MS-AP
MicroShelf Alarm Panel
MS-COPA
MicroShelf Alarm Panel
MS-ILANS
Micro-Shelf Internal LAN Switch
MSC
Main System Controller
MSN
Multi Service Node
MSOH
Multiplexed Section Overhead, rows 5-9 of Section Overhead of STM-1 (G.782) (G.783)
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection (G.782) (G.783)
MSPP
Multi-Service Provisioning Platform
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
15
Abbreviations
MS-R(E)
Manual Switch to Protection, Ring for East
MS-R(W)
Manual Switch to Protection, Ring for West
MS-S(E)
Manual Switch to Protection, Span for East
MS-S(W)
Manual Switch to Protection, Span for West
MS-SPRING Multiplex Section Shared Protection RING MST
1) Multiple Spanning Tree 2) Multiplex Section Termination (G.782/783)
MSTP
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
MT-RJ
Model of optical connector in RJ-45 format
MTS
1) Multiplex Timing Source 2) Multi-wavelength Transport System (TransXpress Infinity)
MTTR
Mean Time to Repair
MUX
Multiplexer
N
16
N.a.
Not applicable
N.C.
Not Connected
NCT
Network Craft Terminal
NDF
New Data Flag
NE
Network Element (G.783) (G.784)
NEC
Network Element Controller
NEAP
Network Element Alarm Panel
NGN
Next Generation Network
NIC
Network Interface Card
NLPID
Network Layer Protocol Identifier
NNI
Network Node Interface
NP
Network Processor
NRoS
Network Rate of Service
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
NRZI
Non Return to Zero / Inverted
NSAP
Network Service Access Point
NT
Network Termination
NTP
Network Time Protocol
NUBAT1/2
Negative Power Supply Voltage
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
NURG
Not Urgent
NUT
Non-pre-emptible unprotected traffic
O O1000-4
Optical 1000BaseSX/LX Gigabit Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports) or configured as VLAN concentrator (1 port) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O1000P-4
Optical 1000BaseSX/LX Gigabit Ethernet Interface Card (4 ports) or configured as VLAN concentrator (1 port) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O155-2
Optical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O155-4
Optical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (4 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O155P-4
Optical 155-Mbit/s Interface Card (4 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O2500P-1
Optical STM-16 interface with contiguous concatenation (1 Port) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
O622-2
Optical 622-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O622C-2
Optical 622-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
O622CP-2
Optical 622-Mbit/s Interface Card (2 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
OA&M
Operation, Administration and Maintenance
OC
Optical Channel
OCP
Optical Channel Protection
OCU
Optical Channel Unit
ODF
Optical Distribution Frame
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
OFS
Out-of-Frame second
OGL
Operator Guidelines
OH
Overhead
OHA
1) Overhead Access (G.783) 2) Overhead Access Unit (card)
OHCC
Overhead Cross Connections
OHX
Overhead Access and Overhead Cross-Connection Function
OLE
Object Linking and Embedding
OPERA
Optical Edge Routing Architecture
OS
Operating System
OSC
Oscillator
OSI (x)
Open Systems Interconnection, Layer x
OSN
Optical Service Node
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
17
Abbreviations
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)
OTH
Optical transmission Hierarchy (ITU-T G.709)
OTN
Optical Transport Network (ITU-T G.709)
OTU-2
Optical Channel Transport Unit level 2
P
18
P1-21
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (21 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P1-42
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (42 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P1P-42
Plesiochronous 2-Mbit/s Interface Card (42 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
P12MD
ASIC for 2Mbit/s Signals (Mapper/Demapper)
P3-3
Plesiochronous 34/45-Mbit/s Interface Card (3 ports) (hiT 7050 FP1)
P3P-3
Plesiochronous 34/45-Mbit/s Interface Card (3 ports) protected (hiT 7050 CC)
P2MP
Point to Multipoint
P2P
Point to Point
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
PC
Personal Computer
PCB
1) Printed Circuit Board, 2) Protection Control Byte
PCC
Power Supply for hiT 7050 CC
PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
PCS
Plesiochronous Connection Supervision
PDC
Passive Dispersion Compensation
PDF
Portable Document Format
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PDU
Protocol Data Unit
PEC
Power Extension Cable for hiT 7050 CC_ES
PF2G5
Packet Switch Fabric Card
PFP1
Power Supply Module on Main Board MFP1 for hiT 7050 FP1
PHY
Physical (Interface)
PIR
Peak Information Rate
PJE
Pointer Justification Event
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
PLM
Payload Mismatch
PM
1) Project Management 2) Performance Management
POADM
Passive Optical Add Drop Multiplexed
POH
Path Overhead (G.782) (G.783)
POS
Packet over SONET/SDH
POSIX
Portable Operating System Interface
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PowerPC
Performance Optimization with Enhanced RISC
PPI
Plesiochronous Physical Interface
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol
pps
Packets per second
PRAM
Persistent Random Access Memory
PRC
Primary Reference Clock
PS
Power Supply
PS300P-6
Ethernet Traffic interface card incl. L2 Switch for hiT 7050 CC
PSC
Peripheral System Controller
PSProtectionshelf Connection and Alarm Panel COPA/NEAP PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
PTR
Pointer
PUBAT
Positive Power Supply Voltage
PVID
Port VLAN ID
Q Q
Standardized Q-interface
QB3
Q Interface (QSTB3, QD2B3)
QEXT
External Q interface
Q-F
Operating Terminal Interface (Serial Interface, RS232)
QD2B3
Q-interface proprietary
QB3
Q Interface (QSTB3, QD2B3) (Ethernet Interface)
QL
Timing quality level
QOS
Quality Of Service
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
19
Abbreviations
QSTB3
Q-interface proprietary
QUICC
Quad Integrated Communication Controller
QST
Q-interface proprietary
R RAID
Redundancy Array of Independent Disks
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAP
Reachable Address Prefix
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RED
Random Early Detect
REI
Remote Error Indication
RFC
Request For Comment
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RISC
Reduced Instruction Set Computer
RJ11
Registered Jack, 4 or 6 pin
RJ45
Registered Jack, 8 pin
RMB
Right Mouse Button
RMON
Remote Network Monitoring
RN
Ring Node
ROM
Read Only Memory
RPR
Resilient Packet Ring
RS, Rsec
Regenerator Section (also Rsect) (G.783)
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead rows 1-3 from Section Overhead in STM1 (G.782) (G.783)
RS232
Recommended Standard 232
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RTAI
Real Time Application Interface
RTC
Real Time Clock
Rx
Receive
S
20
S2M
Primary Multiplex Access (2 Mbit/sec)
SA
Source Address
SAN
Storage Area Network
SBS
Stimulated Brillouin Scattering
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
SC
1) Connector Type 2) Single Core (Single-Row Subrack)
SCOH
System Controller and Overhead (Card)
SD
1) Synchronization distribution 2) Signal Degrade (G.783)
SDF
System Data Format
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDI
Serial Debug Interface
SEC
SDH Equipment Clock
SELV
Separate Extra-Low Voltage
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (G.782) (G.783)
SES
Severely Errored Second
SET
Synchronous Equipment Timing
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF
Signal Fail (G.783)
SF10G
Low Order VC-3/VC-12 Switch Card (10 Gigabit switching capacity)
SF160G
Central VC-4 Switch Card
SF2G5
Low Order VC-3/VC-12 Switch Card (2,5 Gigabit switching capacity)
SFI-5
Serdes Framer Interface Level 5 (40Gbps)
SFM
Single Fiber Mode
SFP
Small Form-factor Pluggable (Optical Modules)
SIPAC
Connector Type
SL
Signal Label
SLD
Synchronous Line equipment (NE)
SLR
Synchronous Line equipment Regenerator
SM
1) Synchronous Multiplexed 2) Security Management
SMA
Synchronous Multiplexer (NE)
SMA-1K
Synchronous Multiplexer for STM-1, Core (NE)
SMF
Single Mode Fiber
SN
Switching network
SNC
Sub-Network Connection
SNCP
Subnetwork Connection Protection
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
21
Abbreviations
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNPA
Subnetwork Point of Attachment
SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SOH
Section Overhead (G.782)
SONET
Synchronous Optical Network
SP
Service Pack
SPI
SDH Physical Interface (G.782) (G.783)
SPI-5
System packet Interface Level 5 (40Gbps)
SPRING
Shared Protection Ring (analog to BSHR)
SRPR
Siemens approach for RPR
SRP
Spatial Reuse Protocol (CISCO)
SRD-MSI
Subrack MSI Double Core
SRS-MSI
Subrack MSI Single Core
SSF
Server Signal Fail
SSL
Secure Socket Layer
SSM
Synchronization Status Message
SSU
Synchronization Supply Unit
STAI
Station Alarm Interface
STM
Synchronous Transport Module (G.782/783/784)
STM-N
Synchronous transport module, level N (N=1, 4, 16, 64, 256)
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
STS-N
Synchronous Transport Signal level N
STU-1
Synchronous Transit Unit for STM-1 (NE)
SU
1) System Unit 2) Switched Unit
SW
Software
T
22
T0
System Clock
T1
Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal
T3
External (G.783) Timing Reference Signal
T4
Timing Reference Output Signal (G.783)
TA
Transaction
T.b.d, TBD
To Be Defined FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
TCA
Threshold Crossing Alert
TCP
Termination Connection Point Transmission Control Protocol
TCN
Threshold Crossing Notification
TD
Transmit degraded
TDM
Time Division Multiplexing
TED
Technical Description
TEX
Ten Gigabit MUX
TF
Transmit fail
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
TIF
Telemetry Interface
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL
Technical Requirement Specification
TL1
Transaction Language 1
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network (G.782) (G.783) (G.784)
TMOUT
Time out for failure of protocol
TMX
Terminal Multiplexer, Termination Multiplexed
TNC
Transit Node Clock
TNM
Telecommunication Network Management
TNMS-C
Transport Network Management System – Core
TNMS-CT
TNMS Craft Terminal
TOH
Transport Overhead
ToS
Type of Service
TP
Termination point
TP0
Transport Protocol Class 0
TP4
Transport Protocol Class 4
TSAP
Transport Service Access Point
TSD
Trail Signal Degrade
TSSU
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal)
TSSU1
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal 622.08Mb/s)
TSSU2
Time Slot Switched Unit (internal traffic signal 2.48832Gb/s)
TSF
Trail Signal Failed
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
23
Abbreviations
TTI
Trail Trace Identifier
TTL
Time to Live
TTs
Trail Termination supervisory function
TU
Tributary Unit
TUG
Tributary Unit Group
Tx
Transmit
TxDeg
Transmit Degraded
TxFail
Transmit Fail
U UAS
Unavailable Second
UAT
Unavailable Time
UBAT
Battery Voltage
UC
Operating Voltage
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
UHC
Ultra High Capacity
ULAF+
Universal Line Access Family
ULED
LED Voltage
ULH
Ultra Long Haul
UMN
User Manual
UMTS
Universal Mobile Telecommunication System
UNEQ
Unequipped
UNI
User Network Interface
UPS
Uninterrupted Power Supply
UTIF2
Universal Traffic Interface (internal traffic signal)
UTOPIA
Universal Test and Operations Physical Interface for ATM
UTP
Unshielded Twisted Pair
V
24
V.11
Physical / Electrical interface characteristics
VC
Virtual Container (G.782) (G.783)
VC-4
Virtual container level 4
VC-n
Virtual Container, level n
VCDB
Variable Configuration Data Block
VLAN
Virtual LAN (IEEE 802.1Q) FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Abbreviations
VLANC
VLAN Concentrator
VPN
Virtual Private Network
VSR
Very Short Reach Connection (optical IF type)
W W
Working
WAN
Wide Area Network
WDF
Watch dog fail
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
WINS
Windows Internet Naming Service
WLS
WDM Longspan System
X X
Symbol for "Cross-over"
XML
Extended Markup Language
Y Z 1..9 10BT
10 Base Twisted Pair (Ethernet)
100BaseTX
100 Base Twisted Pair (Fast Ethernet)
100BaseFX
100 Base Optical interface (Fast Ethernet)
1000BaseLX Gigabit Ethernet optical Long-wavelength (1270 to 1355 nm) 1000BaseSX Gigabit Ethernet optical Short-wavelength (770 to 860 nm) 1000BaseT
Gigabit Ethernet electrical (dual twisted pair interface)
1000BaseZX Gigabit Ethernet optical Long-wavelength (1500nm-1580nm) 2F MSSPRING
Two Fiber Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
4F MSSPRING
Four Fiber Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
25
Abbreviations
26
FT52428EN02GLA1 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Appendix
Appendix
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
Appendix
FT5242EN02GLA01 © 2009 Nokia Siemens Networks
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rückenschilder 25 mm
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rückenschilder 35 mm
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
Rückenschilder 50 mm
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
Optical Networks SURPASS hiT 7080 OAM; General Topics
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
FT5242EN02GLA01
View more...
Comments
